US20120052479A1 - Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs - Google Patents

Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20120052479A1
US20120052479A1 US13/165,600 US201113165600A US2012052479A1 US 20120052479 A1 US20120052479 A1 US 20120052479A1 US 201113165600 A US201113165600 A US 201113165600A US 2012052479 A1 US2012052479 A1 US 2012052479A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
oxygen
tissue
gas
ppm
stasis
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US13/165,600
Inventor
Mark B. Roth
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US13/165,600 priority Critical patent/US20120052479A1/en
Publication of US20120052479A1 publication Critical patent/US20120052479A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N5/00Undifferentiated human, animal or plant cells, e.g. cell lines; Tissues; Cultivation or maintenance thereof; Culture media therefor
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01NPRESERVATION OF BODIES OF HUMANS OR ANIMALS OR PLANTS OR PARTS THEREOF; BIOCIDES, e.g. AS DISINFECTANTS, AS PESTICIDES OR AS HERBICIDES; PEST REPELLANTS OR ATTRACTANTS; PLANT GROWTH REGULATORS
    • A01N1/00Preservation of bodies of humans or animals, or parts thereof
    • A01N1/02Preservation of living parts
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01NPRESERVATION OF BODIES OF HUMANS OR ANIMALS OR PLANTS OR PARTS THEREOF; BIOCIDES, e.g. AS DISINFECTANTS, AS PESTICIDES OR AS HERBICIDES; PEST REPELLANTS OR ATTRACTANTS; PLANT GROWTH REGULATORS
    • A01N1/00Preservation of bodies of humans or animals, or parts thereof
    • A01N1/02Preservation of living parts
    • A01N1/0205Chemical aspects
    • A01N1/021Preservation or perfusion media, liquids, solids or gases used in the preservation of cells, tissue, organs or bodily fluids
    • A01N1/0221Freeze-process protecting agents, i.e. substances protecting cells from effects of the physical process, e.g. cryoprotectants, osmolarity regulators like oncotic agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2500/00Specific components of cell culture medium
    • C12N2500/02Atmosphere, e.g. low oxygen conditions

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to the field of cell biology More particularly, it concerns methods and apparatuses for inducing stasis in isolated tissues and/or organs using a substance that competes with oxygen. In certain embodiments, there are methods and apparatuses for preserving isolated tissue and/or organs.
  • Stasis is a latin term meaning “standstill.”
  • the most common forms of stasis relate to the preservation of tissues for transplant or reattachment.
  • tissue are immersed in a physiologic fluid, such as saline, and placed in the cold to reduce biochemical processes leading to cellular damage.
  • This stasis is incomplete and cannot be relied upon for extended periods.
  • the success of organ transplant and limb reattachments is inversely related to the time the organ or limb is out of contact with the intact organism.
  • a more extreme version of stasis involves placing an entire organism into what is known colloquially as “suspended animation.” Though still considered largely within the realm of science fiction, some notoriety has been achieved when wealthy individuals have sought to be cryopreserved after death in the hopes that future medical breakthroughs will permit their revival, and cure of their fatal ailments. Allegedly, more than one hundred people have been cryopreserved since the first attempt in 1967, and more than one thousand people have made legal and financial arrangements for cryonics with one of several organizations, for example, Alcor Life Extension Foundation. Such methods involve the administration of anti-ischemic drugs, low temperature preservation, and methods to perfuse whole organisms with cryosuspension fluids.
  • inducing stasis in biological matter is characterized by induction or onset of stasis followed by a period of time in which the stasis is maintained, followed then by reversion to a normal or near normal physiological state, or a state that one skilled in the art would recognize as a state that is better than the state of the biological matter had it never undergone stasis, in whole or in part.
  • Stasis can also be defined as what it is not. Organismal stasis is not any of the following states: sleep, comatose, death, anesthetized, or grand mal seizure.
  • compositions and methods that do not rely fully or at all on hypothermia and/or oxygen may be useful in the context of organ preservation, as well as for tissue or cell preservation.
  • Cells and tissue are currently preserved using hypothermia, frequently at temperatures substantially below freezing, such as in liquid nitrogen.
  • dependence on temperature can be problematic, as apparatuses and agents for producing such low temperatures may not be readily available when needed or they may require replacement.
  • tissue culture cells are often stored for periods of time in tanks that hold liquid nitrogen; however, these tanks frequently require that the liquid nitrogen in the unit be periodically replaced, otherwise it becomes depleted and the temperature is not maintained.
  • damage to cells and tissue occurs as a result of the freeze/thaw process.
  • improved techniques are needed.
  • the present invention provides methods, compositions, articles of manufacture, and apparatuses to induce stasis in tissue that are not contained within an organism (“isolated tissue”).
  • isolated tissue The invention is based on studies with compounds that were determined to have a protective function, and thus, serve as protective agents. Moreover, the overall results of studies involving different compounds indicate that compounds with an available electron donor center are particularly effective in inducing stasis. In addition, these compounds induce reversible stasis, meaning they are not so toxic to the particular biologic matter that the matter dies or decomposes. Such compounds can be used in methods, articles of manufacture, and apparatuses to protect, preserve, and/or extend the longevity of the tissue.
  • Tissue in a state of stasis or that have undergone stasis can be used in a number of applications. They can be used, for example, for transfusion or transplantation (therapeutic applications, including organ transplants); for research purposes; for screening assays to identify, characterize, or manufacture other compounds that induce stasis; for testing a sample from which the tissue was obtained (diagnostic applications); for preserving or preventing damage to the tissue that will be placed back into the organism from which they were derived (preventative applications); and for preserving or preventing damage to them during transport or storage. Details of such applications and other uses are described below.
  • the present invention concerns methods for inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising: a) identifying the tissue in which stasis is desired; and, b) exposing the tissue to an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to induce stasis.
  • stasis inducing “stasis” in a tissue means that the tissue is alive but is characterized by one or more of the following: at least a two-fold reduction in the rate or amount of carbon dioxide production by the biological matter; at least a two-fold reduction in the rate or amount of oxygen consumption by the biological matter; and at least a 10% decrease in movement or motility (applies only to organs that exhibit movement, such as a beating heart) (collectively referred to as “cellular respiration indicators”).
  • stasis is temporary and/or reversible, meaning that the biological matter no longer exhibits the characteristics of stasis at some later point in time.
  • biological matter refers to any living biological material (mammalian biological material in preferred embodiments) including cells, tissues, organs, and/or organisms, and any combination thereof.
  • in vivo biological matter refers to biological matter that is in vivo, i.e., still within or attached to an organism. In some embodiments of the invention, biological matter is not in vivo biological matter.
  • biological matter will be understood as synonymous with the term “biological material.”
  • tissue means that the tissue is not located within an organism. In some embodiments, the tissue is all or part of an organ.
  • tissue and “organ” are used according to their ordinary and plain meanings. Thought tissue is composed of cells, it will be understood that the term “tissue” refers to an aggregate of similar cells forming a definite kind of structural material. Moreover, an organ is a particular type of tissue.
  • oxygen antagonist refers to a substance that competes with oxygen insofar as it used by a biological matter that requires oxygen for it to be alive (“oxygen-utilizing biological matter”). Oxygen is typically used or needed for various cellular processes that create the biological matter's primary source of readily utilizable energy. An oxygen antagonist effectively reduces or eliminates the amount of oxygen that is available to the oxygen-utilizing biological matter, and/or the amount of oxygen that can be used by the oxygen-utilizing biological matter. Thus, in some embodiments an oxygen antagonist inhibits or reduces the amount of cellular respiration occurring in the cells, for instance, by binding sites on cytochrome c oxidase that would otherwise bind to oxygen.
  • Cytochrome c oxidase specifically binds oxygen and then converts it to water.
  • the binding to cytochrome c oxidase by the oxygen antagonist is specific.
  • such binding to cytochrome c oxidase is preferably releasable and reversible binding (e.g., has an in vitro dissociation constant, IQ, of at least 10 ⁇ 2 , 10 ⁇ 3 , or 10 ⁇ 4 M, and has an in vitro dissociation constant, K d , not greater than 10 ⁇ 6 , 10 ⁇ 7 , 10 ⁇ 8 , 10 ⁇ 9 , 10 ⁇ 10 , or 10 ⁇ 11 M).
  • an oxygen antagonist is evaluated by measuring ATP and/or carbon dioxide output.
  • an “effective amount” means an amount that can achieve the stated result.
  • an “effective amount” is, for example, an amount that induces stasis in the tissue. It will be understood that when inducing stasis in a tissue or organ, an effective amount is one that induces stasis in the tissue or organ as determined by the collective amount of cellular respiration of the tissue or organ. Accordingly, for example, if the level of oxygen consumption by a heart (collectively with respect to cells of the heart) is decreased at least about 2-fold after exposure to a particular amount of a certain oxygen antagonist, it will be understood that that was an effective amount to induce stasis in the heart.
  • an effective amount of a particular compound is related to how much utilizable oxygen there is available to the biological matter.
  • stasis can be induced when there is about 100,000 ppm or less of oxygen in the absence of any oxygen antagonist (room air has about 210,000 ppm oxygen).
  • the oxygen antagonist serves to alter how much oxygen is effectively available.
  • stasis can be induced because of the competitive effect of an oxygen antagonist with oxygen for binding to essential oxygen metabolizing proteins in the biological matter.
  • an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist reduces the effective oxygen concentration to a point where the oxygen that is present cannot be used.
  • an oxygen antagonist reduces the effective concentration of oxygen by about 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 60-, 70-, 80-, 90-, 100-, 150-, 200-, 250-, 300-, 350-, 400-, 450-, 500-, 600-, 700-, 800-, 900-, 1000-, 1100-, 1200-, 1300-, 1400-, 1500-, 1600-, 1700-, 1800-, 1900-, 2000-, 2100-, 2200-, 2300-, 2400-, 2500-, 2600-, 2700-, 2800-, 2900-, 3000-, 3100-, 3200-, 3300, 3400-, 3500-, 3600-,
  • the effective amount can be expressed as a concentration with or without a qualification on length of time of exposure.
  • tissue is exposed to an oxygen antagonist for about, at least about, or at most about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and
  • biological matter may continue to be exposed to an oxygen antagonist, or, in other embodiments of the invention, the biological matter may no longer be exposed to the oxygen antagonist.
  • This latter step can be achieved either by removing or effectively removing the oxygen antagonist from the presence of the biological matter, or the biological matter may be removed from an environment containing the oxygen antagonist.
  • stasis is induced, and a further step in methods of the invention is to maintain tissue in a state of stasis. This can be accomplished by continuing to expose tissue to an oxygen antagonist and/or exposing the tissue to a non-physiological or controlled temperature. Alternatively, the tissue may be placed in a preservation agent or solution, or be exposed to normoxic or hypoxic conditions.
  • tissue may be maintained in stasis for about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein.
  • Expose is used according to its ordinary meaning to indicate that biological matter is subjected to an oxygen antagonist. This can be achieved in some embodiments by contacting biological matter with an oxygen antagonist. Exposing tissue to an oxygen antagonist can be by incubation in or with (includes immersion) the antagonist, perfusion or infusion with the antagonist, injection of the tissue with an oxygen antagonist, or applying an oxygen antagonist to the tissue/organ or to a surface on which the tissue/organ lays and/or are in close proximity to. These are all ways in which the oxygen antagonist is administered to isolated tissue.
  • an effective amount is characterized as a sublethal dose of the oxygen antagonist.
  • a “sublethal dose” means a single administration of the oxygen antagonist that is less than half of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cells in the tissue to die within 24 hours of the administration.
  • an effective amount is characterized as a near-lethal dose of the oxygen antagonist.
  • a “near lethal dose” means a single administration of the oxygen antagonist that is within 25% of the amount of the inhibitor that would cause at least a majority of cells of the tissue to die within 24 hours of the administration.
  • a sublethal dose is administered by administering a predetermined amount of the oxygen antagonist to the biological material.
  • an effective amount is administered by monitoring, alone or in combination, the amount of oxygen antagonist administered, monitoring the duration of administration of the oxygen antagonist, monitoring a physiological response (e.g., pulse, respiration, pain response, movement or motility, etc.) of the biological material to the administration of the oxygen antagonist and reducing, interrupting or ceasing administration of the oxygen antagonist when a predetermined floor or ceiling for a change in that response is measured, etc.
  • a physiological response e.g., pulse, respiration, pain response, movement or motility, etc.
  • these steps can be employed additionally in any method of the invention.
  • biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that reduces the rate or amount of carbon dioxide production by the biological matter at least 2-fold, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 100-, 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-fold of more, or any range derivable therein.
  • biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that reduces the rate or amount of oxygen consumption by the biological matter at least 2-fold, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 100-, 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-fold of more, or any range derivable therein.
  • biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that decreases movement or motility by at least 10%, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 99, or 100%, or any range derivable therein.
  • methods are provided for reducing cellular respiration, which may or may not be as high as that needed to reach stasis.
  • a reduction in oxygen consumption by about, at least about, or at most about 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100% is provided in methods of the invention. This can also be expressed and assessed in terms of any cellular respiration indicator.
  • biological matter may be exposed to one or more oxygen antagonists more than one time. It is contemplated that biological matter may be exposed to one or more oxygen antagonists 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more times, meaning when a biological matter is exposed multiple times that there are periods of respite (with respect to exposure to the oxygen antagonist) in between.
  • a sublethal collective dose or a nonlethal collective dose is administered to the biological matter.
  • a “sublethal collective dose” means an amount of multiple administrations of the oxygen antagonist that collectively is less than half of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cell(s) to die within 24 hours of one of the administrations.
  • an effective amount is characterized as a near-lethal dose of the oxygen antagonist.
  • a “near lethal collective dose” means an amount of multiple administrations of the oxygen antagonist that is within 25% of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cell(s) to die within 24 hours of the one of the administrations.
  • sub-lethal collective dose and “near-lethal collective dose” can be extrapolated based on the individual doses discussed earlier for stasis in whole organisms.
  • the tissue can be from any source that has oxygen-utilizing cells. More particularly, in some embodiments, the tissue is from a mammal. Mammals from which tissue can be used with the invention include, but are not limited to those that are from a: human, monkey, mouse, rat, rabbit, hamster, goat, pig, dog, cat, ferret, cow, sheep, and horse.
  • tissue can be selected from the group consisting of: heart, lung, kidney, liver, bone marrow, pancreas, skin, bone, vein, artery, cornea, blood, small intestine, large intestine, larynx, brain, spinal cord, smooth muscle, nerves, skeletal muscle, ovary, testis, uterus, and umbilical cord. All or part of a number of these organs are used for transplantation purposes. Moreover, it is contemplated that a combination of different types of tissue may be used in methods of the invention. For example, transplant of a hand involves different tissues and different cell types.
  • Biological matter may be exposed to or contacted with more than one oxygen antagonist.
  • Biological matter may be exposed to at least one oxygen antagonist, including 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more oxygen antagonists, or any range derivable therein.
  • the term “effective amount” refers to the collective amount of oxygen antagonists.
  • the biological matter may be exposed to a first oxygen antagonist and then exposed to a second oxygen antagonist.
  • biological matter may be exposed to more than one oxygen antagonists at the same time or in an overlapping manner.
  • more than one oxygen antagonist may be comprised or mixed together, such as in a single composition to which biological matter is exposed.
  • Methods and apparatuses of the invention involve a protective agent, that in some embodiments is an oxygen antagonist.
  • the oxygen antagonist is a reducing agent.
  • the oxygen antagonist is a chalcogenide compound.
  • the chalcogenide compound comprises sulfur, while in others, it comprises selenium, tellurium, or polonium.
  • a chalcogenide compound contains one or more exposed sulfide groups. It is contemplated that this chalcogenide compounds contains 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or more exposed sulfide groups, or any range derivable therein. In particular embodiments, such a sulfide-containing compound is CS 2 (carbon disulfide).
  • stasis is induced in the tissue/organ by exposing the tissue/organ to a reducing agent that has a chemical structure of
  • X is N, O, Po, S, Se, or Te
  • Y is N or O
  • R 1 is H, C, lower alkyl, a lower alcohol, or CN;
  • R 2 is H, C, lower alkyl, or a lower alcohol, or CN;
  • n 0 or 1
  • n 0 or 1
  • k 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • lower alkyl and lower alcohol are used according to their ordinary meanings and the symbols are the ones used to refer to chemical elements.
  • This chemical structure will be referred to as the “reducing agent structure” and any compound having this structure will be referred to as a reducing agent structure compound.
  • k is 0 in the reducing agent structure.
  • the R 1 and/or R 2 groups can be an amine or lower alkyl amine.
  • R 1 and/or R 2 could be a short chain alcohol or a short chain ketone.
  • R 1 and R 2 may be bridged and/or the compound may be a cyclic compound.
  • X may also be a halogen.
  • R 1 and/or R 2 may be other small organic groups, including, C 2 -C 5 esters, amides, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, ethers, nitriles, anhydrides, halides, acyl halides, sulfides, sulfones, sulfonic acids, sulfoxides, and/or thiols. Such substitutions are clearly contemplated with respect to R 1 and/or R 2 .
  • R 1 and/or R 2 may be short chain versions of the small organic groups discussed above. “Short chain” means 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 carbon molecules, or any range derivable therein.
  • the reducing agent structure compound can be a chalcogenide compound in some cases.
  • the chalcogenide compound has an alkyl chain with an exposed chalcogenide.
  • the chalcogenide compound has a chalcogenide that becomes exposed once it is taken up by the biological matter.
  • the chalcogenide compound is similar to a prodrug as an oxygen antagonist. Therefore, one or more sulfur, selenide, oxygen, tellurium, polonium, or ununhexium molecules on the compound becomes available subsequent to exposure of the biological matter to the chalcogenide compound.
  • “available” means that the sulfur, selenide, oxygen, tellurium, polonium, or ununhexium will retain an electron.
  • the reducing agent structure compound is selected from the group consisting of H 2 S, H 2 Se, H 2 Te, and H 2 Po.
  • the reducing agent structure has an X that is an S.
  • X is Se, or X is Te, or X is Po, or X is O.
  • k in the reducing agent structure is 0 or 1 in some embodiments.
  • the reducing agent structure compound is dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylsulfide (DMS), carbon monoxide, methylmercaptan (CH 3 SH), mercaptoethanol, thiocyanate, hydrogen cyanide, methanethiol (MeSH), or dimethylsulfide (CS 2 ).
  • the oxygen antagonist is H 2 S, H 2 Se, CS 2 , MeSH, or DMS. Compounds on the order of the size of these molecules are particularly contemplated (that is, within 50% of the average of their molecular weights).
  • any compound discussed herein as an oxygen antagonist can be provided in prodrug form to the biological matter, meaning that the biological matter or other substance(s) in the environment of the biological matter alters the prodrug into its active form, that is, into an oxygen antagonist.
  • the oxygen antagonist is provided to the tissue/organ in a state that allows the antagonist to compete with oxygen.
  • the oxygen antagonist may be a gas, semi-solid liquid (such as a gel or paste), liquid, or solid. It is contemplated that biological matter may be exposed to more than one oxygen antagonist and/or to an oxygen antagonist in more than one state.
  • the oxygen antagonist is a gas.
  • the gaseous oxygen antagonist includes carbon monoxide, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, or polonium, or a mixture thereof.
  • an oxygen antagonist is a chalcogenide compound as a gas.
  • the oxygen antagonist is in a gas mixture comprising more than one gas.
  • the other gas(es) is a non-toxic and/or a non-reactive gas in some embodiments.
  • the other gas is a noble gas (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, radon, or ununoctium), nitrogen, nitrous oxide, hydrogen, or a mixture thereof.
  • the gas mixture also contains oxygen.
  • An oxygen antagonist gas is mixed with oxygen to form an oxygen gas mixture in other embodiments of the invention.
  • an oxygen gas mixture in which the amount of oxygen in the oxygen gas mixture is less than the total amount of all other gas or gases in the mixture.
  • the oxygen antagonist gas is carbon monoxide and the amount of carbon monoxide is about the same or exceeds any amount of oxygen in the oxygen gas mixture.
  • carbon monoxide is employed with blood-free biological matter.
  • blood-free biological matter refers to cells and organs whose oxygenation is not dependent, or no longer dependent, on the vasculature, such as an organ for transplant.
  • the atmosphere will be 100% CO, but as will be evident to one skilled in the art, the amount of CO may be balanced with gases other than oxygen providing that the amount of usable oxygen is reduced to a level that prevents cellular respiration.
  • the ratio of carbon monoxide-to-oxygen is preferably 85:15 or greater, 199:1 or greater or 399:1 or greater. In certain embodiments, the ratio is about, at least about, or at most about 1:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 55:1, 60:1, 65:1, 70:1, 75:1, 80:1, 85:1, 90:1, 95:1, 100:1, 110:1, 120:1, 130:1, 140:1, 150:1, 160:1, 170:1, 180:1, 190:1, 200:1, 210:1, 220:1, 230:1, 240:1, 250:1, 260:1, 270:1, 280:1, 290:1, 300:1, 310:1, 320:1, 330:1, 340:1, 350:1, 360:1, 370:1, 380:1, 390:1, 400:1, 410:1, 420:1,
  • the above numbers pertain to the ratio of carbon monoxide to a mixture of oxygen and one or more other gases.
  • the other gas is a nonreactive gas such as nitrogen (N 2 ).
  • N 2 nitrogen
  • the above numbers apply to ratios of carbon monoxide to a combination of oxygen and nitrogen (O 2 /N 2 ) that can be used in methods and apparatuses of the invention. Accordingly, it will be understood that other gases may or may not be present.
  • the CO:oxygen ratio is balanced with one or more other gases (non-carbon monoxide and non-oxygen gases).
  • the CO:oxygen ratio is balanced with nitrogen.
  • the amount of CO is a ratio of CO compared to room air, as is described by the numbers above.
  • the amount of carbon monoxide is relative to the amount of oxygen, while in others, it is an absolute amount.
  • the amount of oxygen is in terms of “parts per million (ppm)” which is a measure of the parts in volume of oxygen in a million parts of air at standard temperature and pressure of 20° C. and one atmosphere pressure and the balance of the gas volume is made up with carbon monoxide.
  • ppm parts per million
  • the amount of carbon monoxide to oxygen is related in terms of parts per million of oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide.
  • the atmosphere to which the biological material is exposed or incubated may be at least 0, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 1000, or 2000 parts per million (ppm) of oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide and in some cases carbon monoxide mixed with a non-toxic and/or non-reactive gas
  • the term “environment” refers to the immediate environment of the biological matter, that is, the environment with which it is in direct contact.
  • the biological matter must be directly exposed to carbon monoxide, and it is insufficient that a sealed tank of carbon monoxide be in the same room as the biological matter and be considered to be incubated an “environment” according to the invention.
  • the atmosphere may be expressed in terms of kPa.
  • the environment in which a biological material is incubated or exposed to is about, at least about, or at most about 0.001, 0.005, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04, 0.05, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.10, 0.11, 0.12, 0.13, 0.14, 0.15, 0.16, 0.17, 0.18, 0.19, 0.20, 0.21, 0.22, 0.23, 0.24, 0.25, 0.26, 0.27, 0.28, 0.29, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.5, 0.90, 0.95, 1.0 kPa or more O 2 , or any range derivable therein.
  • the atmosphere may be defined in terms of CO levels in kPa units.
  • the atmosphere is about, at least about, or at most about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 101, 101.3 kPa CO, or any range derivable therein.
  • the partial pressure is about or at least about 85, 90, 95, 101, 101.3 kPa CO, or any range derivable therein.
  • the amount of time the sample is incubated or exposed to carbon monoxide can also vary in embodiments of the invention.
  • the sample is incubated or exposed to carbon monoxide for about, for at least about, or for at most about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60 or more minutes and/or, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, hours, and/or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more days.
  • Biological matter is exposed to the gas in a closed container in some embodiments of the invention.
  • the closed container can maintain a particular environment or modulate the environment as is desired.
  • the environment refers to the amount of oxygen antagonist that the biological matter is exposed and/or the temperature of the environment.
  • the biological matter is placed under a vacuum before, during, or after exposure to an oxygen antagonist.
  • the biological matter is exposed to a normoxic environment after being exposed to an oxygen antagonist.
  • the environment containing the biological matter cycles at least once to a different amount or concentration of the oxygen antagonist, wherein the difference in amount or concentration is by at least one percentage difference.
  • the environment may cycle back and forth between one or more amounts or concentrations of the oxygen antagonist, or it may gradually increase or decrease the amount or concentrations of an oxygen antagonist.
  • the different amount or concentration is between about 0 and 99.9% of the amount or concentration of the oxygen antagonist to which the biological matter was initially exposed.
  • the difference in amount and/or concentration is about, at least about, or at most about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99% or more, or
  • Methods of the invention can also include a step of subjecting biological matter to a controlled temperature environment.
  • the biological matter is exposed to a temperature that is a “non-physiological temperature environment,” which refers to a temperature in which the biological matter cannot live in for more than 96 hours.
  • the controlled temperature environment can have a temperature of about, at least about, or at most about ⁇ 210, ⁇ 200, ⁇ 190, ⁇ 180, ⁇ 170, ⁇ 160, ⁇ 150, ⁇ 140, ⁇ 130, ⁇ 120, ⁇ 110, ⁇ 100, ⁇ 90, ⁇ 80, ⁇ 70, ⁇ 60, ⁇ 50, ⁇ 40, ⁇ 30, ⁇ 20, ⁇ 10, ⁇ 5, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80
  • Bio matter may also be exposed to an oxygen antagonist at room temperature, which means a temperature between about 20° C. and about 25° C. Furthermore, it is contemplated the biological matter achieves a core temperature of any amount or range of amounts discussed.
  • the biological matter can be subjected to a non-physiological temperature environment or a controlled temperature environment during or after exposure to the oxygen antagonist(s). Furthermore, in some embodiments, the biological matter is subjected to a non-physiological temperature environment or a controlled temperature environment for a period of time between about one minute and about one year.
  • the amount of time may be about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein.
  • the temperature may be altered or cycled during the process.
  • the temperature of the biological matter may first be reduced before it is placed in the environment that has the oxygen antagonist, while in others, the biological matter may be cooled by placing it in the oxygen antagonist environment, that is below the temperature of the biological matter.
  • the biological matter and/or environment may be cooled or heated gradually, such that the temperature of the biological matter or environment starts at one temperature but then reaches another temperature.
  • methods include modulating environmental oxygen levels or removing the biological material from an environment having oxygen.
  • exposing biological material to an environment in which oxygen is diminished or absent may mimic exposure of the biological material to an oxygen antagonist.
  • compositions, methods, and articles of manufacture of the invention can be used on biological matter that will be transferred back into the donor organism from which it was derived (autologous) or a different recipient (heterologous) subject.
  • biological matter is obtained directly from a donor organism.
  • the biological matter is placed in culture prior to exposure to an oxygen antagonist.
  • the biological matter is obtained from a donor organism administered extracorporeal membrane oxygenation prior to retrieval of the biological matter, which is a technique implemented to aid in the preservation of biological matter.
  • methods include administering or implanting the biological matter in which stasis was induced to a live recipient organism.
  • an organ or tissue to be retrieved and then transplanted is exposed to the oxygen antagonist while still in the donor subject. It is contemplated that in some cases, the vasculature of the donor is used to expose the organ or tissue to the oxygen antagonist. This can be done if the heart is still pumping or a pump, catheter, or syringe can be used to administer the oxygen antagonist into the vasculature for delivery to the organ or tissue
  • Methods of the invention also concern inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising incubating the tissue with an oxygen antagonist that creates hypoxic conditions for an effective amount of time for the tissue to enter stasis.
  • embodiments of the invention include methods of reducing oxygen demand in isolated tissue comprising contacting the tissue with an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to reduce its oxygen demand. It is contemplated that oxygen demands is reduced about, at least about, or at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98,
  • tissue that is separate from an organism
  • methods for preserving a tissue that is separate from an organism comprising contacting the tissue with an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to preserve the majority of cells constituting the tissue.
  • the tissues may be exposed to the oxygen antagonist within about or within at least about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4 hours or more, and any combination or range derivable therein, of its being retrieved (separated) from the deceased organism.
  • the invention also concerns a method for inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising incubating the tissue with an oxygen antagonist for an effective amount of time to render conditions hypoxic induce the tissue to enter stasis.
  • there is a method for delaying the effects of a trauma on the tissue comprising exposing the tissue to a sub-lethal dose of an oxygen antagonist.
  • there is a method for preserving tissue ex vivo comprising contacting the tissue with a sub-lethal dose of a chalcogenide compound.
  • Methods of the invention can involve employing an apparatus or system that maintains the environment in which biological matter is placed or exposed to.
  • the invention includes an apparatus in which an oxygen antagonist, particularly as a gas, is supplied.
  • the apparatus includes a container with a sample chamber for holding the biological matter, wherein the container is connected to a supply of gas comprising the oxygen antagonist(s).
  • the container may be a solid container or it may flexible, such as a bag.
  • the invention is an apparatus for preserving tissue/organ, the apparatus comprising: a container having a sample chamber with a volume of no greater than 775 liters; and a first gas supply in fluid communication with the sample chamber, the first gas supply including carbon monoxide.
  • the apparatus also includes a cooling unit that regulates the temperature inside the sample chamber and/or a gas regulator that regulates the amount of oxygen antagonist in the chamber or the amount of oxygen antagonist in a solution that is in the chamber.
  • the second gas supply may be connected with the sample chamber or it may be connected with the first gas supply.
  • the additional gas as discussed above, may be a non-toxic and/or non-reactive gas.
  • a gas regulator is part of the apparatus in some embodiments of the invention.
  • One, two, three, or more gas regulators may be employed.
  • the gas regulator regulates the gas supplied to the sample chamber from the first gas supply.
  • it regulates the gas supplied to the sample chamber or first gas supply from the second gas supply, or there may be a regulator for both the first and second gas supplies.
  • any gas regulator can be programmed to control the amount of gas supplied to the sample chamber and/or to another gas supply. The regulation may or may not be for a specified period of time.
  • the gas regulator is electronically programmable.
  • the pressure and/or the temperature inside the chamber can be regulated with either a pressure regulator or temperature regulator, respectively. As with the gas regulator, these regulators may be electronically programmable.
  • the apparatus of the invention may also have a cooling and/or heating unit to achieve the temperatures discussed above. The unit may or may not be electronically programmable.
  • the apparatus includes a wheeled cart on which the container rests or it may have one or more handles.
  • the invention includes an apparatus for cell(s), in which the apparatus has: a container having a sample chamber; a first gas supply in fluid communication with the sample chamber, the first gas supply including the oxygen antagonist(s); and an electronically-programmable gas regulator that regulates gas supplied to the sample chamber from the first gas supply.
  • the apparatus also has a structure configured to provide a vacuum within the sample chamber.
  • any oxygen antagonist described in this application is contemplated for use with apparatuses of the invention.
  • carbon monoxide can be administered using this apparatus.
  • a chalcogenide compound can be administered or a compound having the reducing agent structure.
  • a candidate substance is screened for the ability to act as an oxygen antagonist. This can be done using any assay described herein, such as by measuring carbon dioxide output. Any substance identified as having exhibiting characteristics of an oxygen antagonist can be further characterized or tested. Moreover, it is contemplated that such a substance can be administered to biological matter to induce stasis or manufactured thereafter.
  • any oxygen antagonist can be used in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of any disease or condition requiring implantation or transplantation of live tissue, such as for treating myocardial ischemia, loss of an organ or organ function, loss of a limb, loss of eyesight, loss of vocal abilities, cancer (including leukemia), neurodegenerative diseases or conditions, bowel diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney diseases or conditions, eye diseases or conditions, heart diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney and/or pancreas diseases or conditions, nerve damage or loss, larynx diseases or conditions, lung diseases or conditions, uterus diseases or conditions, genitourinary diseases or conditions, reproductive conditions or diseases, blood diseases or conditions, immune system diseases or conditions, burns, bone loss, skin loss, or disfiguration.
  • cancer including leukemia
  • neurodegenerative diseases or conditions bowel diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney diseases or conditions, eye diseases or conditions, heart diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney and/or pancreas diseases or conditions, nerve damage or loss, la
  • FIG. 1 Human keratinocytes survive exposure to 100% CO. Cells were inspected visually using an inverted phase contrast microscope. Quantitation of the number of viable keratinocytes as judged by trypan blue staining, which is an indicator of cell death.
  • FIG. 2 Discontinuity of survivability in hypoxia. Viabilities to adulthood were assayed following exposure to 24 hours of anoxia (pure N 2 ), intermediate hypoxia (0.01 kPa O 2 , 0.05 kPa O 2 or 0.1 kPa O 2 ) or mild hypoxia (0.5 kPa O 2 ) in wild-type embryos. All data points are the result of at least 3 independent experiments and worms that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total.
  • anoxia pure N 2
  • intermediate hypoxia (0.01 kPa O 2 , 0.05 kPa O 2 or 0.1 kPa O 2
  • mild hypoxia 0.5 kPa O 2
  • FIG. 3 Carbon monoxide protects against hypoxia. Viabilities to adulthood were assayed following exposure to 24 hours of pure carbon monoxide, 0.05 kPa O 2 /N 2 or 0.05 kPa O 2 /CO in wild-type embryos. All data points are the result of at least 3 independent experiments and worms that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total.
  • FIG. 4 A Metal rate decreases before body core temperature when mice are exposed to hydrogen sulfide. Exposure of mice to 80 ppm (at 0 minutes on the X axis) results in an approximately 3 fold decrease in CO2 production (black line) in less than five minutes. This precedes the drop in core temperature of the animal toward the ambient temperature (gray line).
  • FIG. 4B Temporal Analysis of mice exposed to hydrogen sulfide. Each trace represents a continuous measurement of core body temperature individual mouse exposed to either 80 ppm of H 2 S, or to room air. Numbers on the vertical axis are temperature in ° Celsius. On the horizontal axis, the numbers reflect time in hours. The experiments were carried out for 6 hours followed by recordings of the recovery. The beginning point is at 1:00, and the end of the 6 hr treatment is about 7:00.
  • FIG. 5 A Exposure to 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide causes the core body temperature of a mouse to approach ambient temperature. Gas was turned on and temperature decreased starting at time 0:00. Atmosphere switched back to room air at time 6:00. Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse as determined by radiotelemetry. This was approximately 39° C. at time 0:00. Diamonds indicate the ambient temperature which was reduced from 23° C. to 13° C. in the first 3 hours of the experiment, and then increased again toward 23° C. from hour 6:00 stabilizing at around hour 9:00.
  • FIG. 6 The rate of body core temperature drop is dependent upon the concentration of hydrogen sulfide given to the mice. All lines represent core body temperature of a single mouse as determined by radiotelemetry. Mice subjected to 20 ppm and 40 ppm H 2 S exhibit minor drops in core temperature. Exposure to 60 ppm induced a substantial drop in temperature beginning at approximately hour 4:00. The mouse exposed to 80 ppm exhibited a substantial drop in temperature beginning at approximately hour 2:00.
  • FIG. 7 Lowest core body temperature. The lowest core body temperature recorded for a mouse exposed to 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide was 10.7° C. Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse as determined by radiotelemetry which started at approximately 39° C. at time 0. Diamonds indicate the ambient temperature which began at approximately 23° C. and was dropped to less than 10° C. by the mid-point of the experiment, after which it was then increased again toward room temperature.
  • FIG. 8 A Endogenous levels of hydrogen sulfide are increased in mice acclimated to warm temperatures. Gray bars (two left bars) indicate endogenous H 2 S concentrations of two individual mice acclimated to 4° C.; black bars (two right bars) indicate the endogenous H2S concentrations of two individual mice acclimated to 30° C. Hydrogen sulfide concentration determined by GC/MS.
  • FIG. 8 B Effects of Ambient Temperature on Hydrogen Sulfide Dependent Temperature prop.
  • the rate of core temperature (expressed in degrees Centigrade) drop due to hydrogen sulfide exposure is dependent on the acclimation temperature.
  • the mice were exposed to the gas at 1:00.
  • Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse, acclimated to 12° C., as determined by radiotelemetry. Squares indicate the core body temperature of the animal acclimated to 30° C.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic drawing illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic drawing illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to further embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating operations according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic drawing illustrating a tissue treatment gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating operations according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 Metabolic inhibition protects against hypothermia-induced death in Nematodes. Nematodes exposed to cold temperatures (4° C.) are unable to survive after 24 hours. However, if kept in anoxic conditions during the period of hypothermia (and for a 1 hour period before and after), a substantial proportion of the nematodes survive.
  • Stasis a cell, tissue or organ, or organism (collectively referred to as “biological material”) is living, but cellular functions necessary for cell division, developmental progression, metabolic state are slowed or even stopped. This state is desirable in a number of contexts. Stasis can be used as a method of preservation by itself, or it may be induced as part of a cryopreservation regimen. Biological materials may be preserved for research use, for transportation, for transplantation, for therapeutic treatment (such as ex vivo therapy), and to prevent the onset of trauma, for example. Stasis with respect to entire organisms have similar uses. For instance, transportation of organisms could be facilitated if they had entered stasis.
  • Stasis may be beneficial by decreasing the need of the biological material for oxygen and, therefore, bloodflow. It may extend the period of time that biological material can be isolated from a life-sustaining environment and exposed to a death-inducing environment.
  • the present invention is based on the observation that certain types of compounds effectively induce reversible stasis in biological matter.
  • thermoregulation is a characteristic of so-called “warm-blooded” animals, which permits the organism to maintain a relatively constant core body temperature even when exposed to significantly altered (cold or hot) environmental temperatures.
  • the ability to control thermoregulation by induction of stasis is one aspect of the invention, and permits uses similar to those discussed above.
  • Thermal regulation may be a facilitated by placing of organisms, limbs or isolated organs or tissues into chambers/devices, the temperature of which can be controlled.
  • warm rooms or chamber-like devices similar to hyperbaric chambers may encompass an entire organism and be connected to thermo-regulatory apparatus.
  • Smaller devices such as blankets, sleeves, cuffs or gloves (e.g., CORE CONTROL cooling system by AVAcore Technologies, Palo Alto, Calif., U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,277) are also contemplated.
  • Such chambers/devices may be used both to increase or reduce ambient temperatures.
  • Bio material contemplated for use with the present invention include material derived from invertebrates and vertebrates, including mammals; biological materials includes organisms.
  • the invention can be employed with respect to mammals of veterinary or agricultural importance including those from the following classes: canine, feline, equine, bovine, ovine, murine, porcine, caprine, rodent, lagomorph, lupine, and ursine.
  • the invention also extends to fish and birds. Other examples are disclosed below.
  • the type of biological matter varies. It can be cells, tissues and organs, as well as organisms for which different compositions, methods, and apparatuses have relevance.
  • the nonprovisional U.S. patent applications entitled “Methods, Compositions and Devices for Inducing Stasis in Cells” and “Methods, Compositions and Devices for Inducing Stasis in Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organisms” in the name of Mark. B. Roth filed on Oct. 22, 2004 are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • the mammal is of the Order Monotremata, Marsupialia, Insectivora, Macroscelidia, Dermoptera, Chiroptera, Scandentia, Primates, Xenarthra, Pholidota, Tubulidentata, Lagomorpha, Rodentia, Cetacea, Carnivora, Proboscidea, Hyracoidea, Sirenia, Perissodactyla, or Artiodactyla.
  • Monotremata examples include the Families Tachyglossidae (e.g., Echidnas) and Ornithorhynchidae (e.g., Platypus).
  • Marsupialia examples include the Families Didelphidae (e.g., Opossums), Microbiothieridae (e.g., Monito del Monte), Caenolestidae (e.g., Rat Oppossums), Dasyuridae (e.g., Marsupial mice), Myrmecobiidae (e.g., Numbat), Thylacinidae (e.g., Thylacine), Peramelidae (e.g., Bandicoots), Thylacomyidae (e.g., Rabbit Bandicoots), Notoryctidae (e.g., Marsupial Moles), Phalangeridae (e.g., Cus
  • Insectivora includes, for example, the Families Solenodontidae (e.g., Solenodons), Tenrecidae (e.g., Tenrecs, Otter Shrews), Chrysochloridae (e.g., Golden Moles), Erinaceidae (e.g., Hedgehogs, Moonrats), Soricidae (e.g., Shrews), and Talpidae (e.g., Moles, Desmans).
  • the Order Macroscelidia includes the Family Macroscelidia (e.g., Elephant Shrews).
  • the Order Scandentia includes Tupaiidae (e.g., Tree Shrews).
  • the Order Dermoptera includes the Family Cynocephalidea (e.g., Flying Lemurs).
  • Chiroptera includes the Families Pteropodidae (e.g., Fruit Bats, Flying Foxes), Rhinopomatidae (e.g., Mouse-Tailed Bats), Craseonycteridae (e.g., Hog-Nosed or Bumblebee Bat), Emballonuridae (e.g., Sheath-Tailed Bats), Nycteridae (e.g., Slit-Faced Bats), Megadermatidae (e.g., False Vampire Bats), Rhinolophidae (e.g., Horshoe Bats), Noctilionidae (e.g., Bulldog Bats, Fisherman Bats), Mormoopidae, Phyllostomidae (e.g., New World Leaf-Nosed Bats), Natalid
  • the Order Primates includes the Families Lemuridae (e.g., Lemurs), Chemogaleidae (e.g., Mouse Lemurs), Indriidae (e.g., Indri, Woolly Lemur), Daubentoniidae (e.g., Aye-Aye), Lorisidae (e.g., Lorises, Bushbabies, Galagos), Tarsiidae (e.g., Tarsiers), Cebidae (e.g., New World Monkeys, Marmosets, Tamarins), Hylobatidae (e.g., Gibbons), Pongidae (e.g., Apes), and Hominidae (e.g., Man).
  • Families Lemuridae e.g., Lemurs
  • Chemogaleidae e.g., Mouse Lemurs
  • Indriidae e.g., Indr
  • Examples of Xenarthra include Myrmecophagidae (e.g., Anteaters), Bradypodidae (e.g., Three-Toed Sloths), Megalonychidae (e.g., Two-Toed Sloths), and Dasypodidae (e.g., Armadillos).
  • Examples of Pholidota include Manidae (e.g., Pangolins).
  • Examples of Tubulidentata include Orycteropodidae (e.g., Aardvarks).
  • Examples of Lagomorpha include Ochotonidae (e.g., Pikas) and Leporidae (e.g., Hares and Rabbits).
  • the Order Rodentia includes the Families Aplodontidae (e.g., Mountain Beavers), Sciuridae (e.g., Squirrels, Marmots, Chipmunks), Geomyidae (e.g., Pocket Gophers), Heteromyidae (e.g., Pocket Mice, Kangaroo Rats), Castoridae (e.g., Beaver), Anomaluridae (e.g., Scaly-Tailed Squirrels), Pedetidae (e.g., Springhare), Muridae (e.g., Rats and Mice), Gliridae (e.g., Dormice), Seleviniidae (e.g., Desert Dormouse), Zapodidae (e.g., Jumping Mice), Dipodidae (e.g., Jerboas), Hystricidae (e.g., Old World Porcupines),
  • the Order Cetacea includes the Families Iniidae (e.g., Amazon Popoise), Lipotidae, Platanistidae, Pontoporiidae, Ziphiidae (e.g., Beaked Whales), Physeteridae (e.g., Sperm Whales), Monodontidae (e.g., Beluga Whale, Narwhal), Delphinidae (e.g., Marine Dolphins, Killer Whales), Phocoenidae (e.g., Porpoises), Balaenopteridae (e.g., Rorquals), Balaenidae (e.g., Right Whales), and Eschrichtiidae (e.g., Gray Whales).
  • Families Iniidae e.g., Amazon Popoise
  • Lipotidae Lipotidae
  • Platanistidae Platanistidae
  • the Order Carnivora includes the Families Canidae (e.g., Dogs, Foxes, Wolves, Jackals, Coyotes), Ursidae (e.g., Bears), Procyonidae (e.g., Raccoons, Coatis, Kinkajous, Lesser Pandas), Ailuropodidae (e.g., Giant Pandas), Mustelidae (e.g., Weasels, Skunks, Badgers, Otters), Viverridae (e.g., Civets, Genets), Herpestidae (e.g., Mongooses), Protelidae (e.g., Aardwolf), Hyaenidae (e.g., Hyenas), Felidae (e.g., Cats), Otariidae (e.g., Eared Seals, Sea Lions), Odobenidae (e.g.,
  • the Order Proboscidea includes the Family Elephantidae (e.g., Elephants).
  • Hyracoidea includes the Family Procaviidae (e.g., Hyraxes).
  • Sirenia includes the Families Dugongidae (e.g., Dugong) and Trichechidae (e.g., Manatees).
  • the Order Perissodactyla includes the Families Equidae (e.g., Horses, Asses, Zebras), Tapiridae (e.g., Tapirs), and Rhinocerotidae (e.g., Rhinoceroses).
  • the Order Artiodactyla includes the Families Suidae (e.g., Pigs, Babirusa), Tayassuidae (e.g., Peccaries), Hippopotamidae (e.g., Hippopotamuses), Camelidae (e.g., Camels, Llamas, Vicunas), Tragulidae (e.g., Chevrotains), Moschidae (e.g., Musk Deer), Cervidae (e.g., Deer, Elk, Moose), Giraffidae (e.g., Giraffe, Okapi), Antilocapridae (e.g., Pronghorn), and Bovidae (e.g., Cattle, Sheep, Antelope, Goats).
  • Families Suidae e.g., Pigs, Babirusa
  • Tayassuidae e.g., Peccaries
  • the biological material is a reptile or is derived from a reptile.
  • the reptile may be of the Order Chelonia, Pleurodira, Squamata, Rhynchocephalia, or Crocodylia.
  • a reptile of the Order Chelonia may be, for example, a Carettochelyidae, Chelydridae (e.g., Snapping Turtles), Cheloniidae (e.g., Loggerhead Turtles, Green Turtles), Dermatemydidae (e.g., Leatherback Turtles), Emydidae (e.g., Painted Turtles, Pond Sliders, Pond Turtles, Snail-Eating Turtles, Box Turtles), Kinosternidae (e.g., Stinkpot Turtles), Saurotypidae, Testudinidae (e.g., Galapagos Tortoises, Desert Tortoises, Aldabra Turtles, Spu-Thighed Tor
  • a reptile of the Order Squamata may be, for example, an Agamidae (e.g., Rainbow Lizards, Bearded Dragons, Indian Bloodsuckers, Spiny-Tailed Lizards), Chamaeleontdidae (e.g., Chameleons), Iguanidae (e.g., Anoles, Basilisks, Collared Lizards, Iguanas, Horned Lizards, Chuckwallas, Sagebrush Lizards, Side-Blotched Lizards), Gekkonidae (e.g., Geckos), Pygopodidae, Teiidae (e.g., Race Runners, Tegus), Lacertidae (e.g., Sand Lizards, Ocellated Lizards, Viviparous Lizards, Wall Lizards, Long-Tailed Lizards), Xantuslidae, Scincidae (e.g., Skinks), Cordylidae (
  • a reptile of the Order Rhynchocephalia may be, for example, a Sphenodontidae (e.g., Tuataras).
  • a reptile of the Order Crocodylia may be, for example, an Alligatoridae (e.g., Alligators, Caiman), Crocodylidae (e.g., Crocodiles), or a Gavialidae (e.g., Gharials).
  • the biological material of the present invention may be an amphibian or may be derived from an amphibian.
  • the amphibian may be, for example, a frog or a toad.
  • the frog or toad may be, for example, an Arthroleptidae (e.g., screeching frogs), Ascaphidae (e.g., tailed frogs), Brachycephalidae (e.g., gold frogs and shield toads), Bufonidae (e.g., true toads), Centrolenidae (e.g., glass frogs and leaf frogs), Dendrobatidae (e.g., poison-dart frogs), Discoglossidae (e.g., fire-bellied toads), Heleophrynidae (e.g., ghost frogs), Hemisotidae (e.g
  • the amphibian may be a salamander.
  • the salamander may be, for example, an Ambystomatidae (e.g., mole salamanders), Amphiumidae (e.g., amphiumas), Cryptobranchidae (e.g., giant salamanders and hellbenders), Dicamptodontidae (e.g., Pacific giant salamanders), Hynobiidae (e.g., Asiatic salamanders), Plethodontidae (e.g., lungless salamanders), Proteidae (e.g., mudpuppies and waterdogs), Rhyacotritonidae (e.g., torrent salamanders), Salamandridae (e.g., newts and salamanders), or a Sirenidae (e.g., sirens).
  • Ambystomatidae e.g., mole salam
  • the amphibian may be a Caecilian.
  • the Caecilian may be, for example, a Caeciliidae (e.g., caecilians), Ichthyophiidae (e.g., Asiatic tailed caecilians), Rhinatrematidae (e.g., neotropical tailed caecilians), Scolecomorphidae (e.g., African caecilians), Typhlonectidae (e.g., aquatic caecilians), or an Uraeotyphlidae (e.g., Indian caecilians).
  • Caeciliidae e.g., caecilians
  • Ichthyophiidae e.g., Asiatic tailed caecilians
  • Rhinatrematidae e.g., neotropical tailed caecilians
  • Scolecomorphidae e.g., African
  • the biological material of the present invention may be a bird or may be derived from a bird.
  • the bird may be, for example, an Anseriforme (e.g., waterfowl), Apodiforme (e.g., hummingbirds and swifts), Caprimulgiforme (e.g., nightbirds), Charadriiforme (e.g., shorebirds), Ciconiiforme (e.g., storks), Coliiforme (e.g., mousebirds), Columbiforme (e.g., doves and pigeons), Coraciiforme (e.g., kingfishers), Craciforme (e.g., chacalacas, curassows, guans, megapodes), Cuculiforme (e.g., cuckoos, hoatzin, turacos), Falconiforme (e.g., diurnal birds of prey), Galliforme (
  • the biological material of the present invention may be a fish or may be derived from a fish.
  • the fish may be, for example, an Acipenseriforme (e.g., paddlefishes, spoonfishes, and sturgeons), Polypteriforme (e.g., bichirs, birchers, lobed-finned pike, and reed fishes), Atheriniforme (e.g., rainbow fishes and silversides), Beloniforme (e.g., halfbeeks and needlefishes), Beryciforme, Channiforme, Cyprinodontiforme (e.g., killifishes), Dactylopteriforme (e.g., flying gurnards), Gasterosteiforme (e.g., pipefishes and sticklebacks), Mugiliforme (e.g., mullets), Pegasiforme (e.g., dragonfishes and sea moths), Per
  • the biological material maybe an invertebrate or derived from an invertebrate.
  • the invertebrate may be, for example, a Porifera (e.g., sponges), Cnidaria (e.g., jellyfish, hydras, sea anemones, Portuguese man-of-wars, and corals), Platyhelminthe (e.g., flatworms, including planaria, flukes, and tapeworms), Nematoda (e.g., roundworms, including rotifers and nematodes), Mollusca (e.g., mollusks, snails, slugs, octopuses, squids), Annelida (e.g., segmented worms, including earthworms, leeches, and marine worms), Echinodermata (e.g., sea stars, sea cucumbers, sand dollars, sea urchins), Phoronida (e.g., Horseshoe Worm
  • An Arthropod may be, for example, a Coleoptera (e.g., beetles), Diptera (e.g., true flies), Hymenoptera (e.g., ants, bees, wasps), Lepidoptera (e.g., butterflies, moths), Mecoptera (e.g., scorpion flies), Megaloptera, Neuroptera (e.g., lacewings and relatives), Siphonaptera (e.g., fleas), Strepsiptera (e.g., parasitic insects and twisted-winged parasites), Trichoptera (e.g., caddisflies), Anoplura (e.g., sucking lice), Hemiptera (e.g., true bugs and their relatives), Mallophaga (e.g., biting lice), Psocoptera (e.g., psocids), Thysanoptera (e.g., thrips
  • the biological material of the present invention may be a fungi or may be derived from a fungi.
  • the fungi may be, for example, an Ascomycota (sac fungi), Basidiomycota (club fungi), Chytridiomycota (chytrids), Deuteromycota, or a Zygomycota.
  • the fungi may be a Rhizopus, Pilobolus, Arthrobotrys, Aspergillus, Allomyces, Chytridium, Agaricus, Amanita, Cortinarius, Neurospora, Moschella, Saccharomyces, Pichia, Candida, Schizosaccharomyces , or Ergot.
  • the fungi may be Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Schizosaccharomyces pombe, Candida albicans , or Pichia pastoris.
  • the biological material of the present invention may be a plant or may be derived from a plant.
  • the plant may be a Bryophyte (e.g., mosses, liverworts, hornworts), Lycophyte (e.g., club mosses, ground pine), Sphenophyte (e.g., horsetails), Pterophyte (e.g., ferns), Cycadophyte (e.g., cycads), Gnetophyte (e.g., gnetum, ephedra, welwitschia), Coniferophyte (e.g., conifers), Ginkophyte (e.g., ginko), or Anthophyte (e.g., flowering plants).
  • Bryophyte e.g., mosses, liverworts, hornworts
  • Lycophyte e.g., club mosses, ground pine
  • the Anthophyte may be a monocot or a dicot.
  • Non-limiting examples of monocotyledonous plants include wheat, maize, rye, rice, turfgrass, sorghum, millet, sugarcane, lily, iris, agave, aloe, orchids, bromeliads, and palms.
  • Non-limiting examples of dicotyledonous plants include tobacco, tomato, potato, soybean, sunflower, alfalfa, canola, rose, Arabidopsis , coffee, citrus fruits, beans, alfalfa, and cotton.
  • the biological material of the present invention may be a Protist or may be derived from a Protist.
  • the Protist may be a Rhodophyte (e.g., red algea), Phaeophyte (e.g., brown algea, kelp), Chlorophyte (e.g., green algea), Euglenophyte (e.g., euglenoids) Myxomycot (e.g., slime molds), Oomycot (e.g., water molds, downy mildews, potato blight), or Bacillariophyte (e.g., diatoms).
  • Rhodophyte e.g., red algea
  • Phaeophyte e.g., brown algea, kelp
  • Chlorophyte e.g., green algea
  • Euglenophyte e.g., euglenoids
  • the biological material is a prokaryote or is derived from a prokaryote.
  • the prokaryote is an Archaea (archaebacteria).
  • the archaebacteria may be, for example, a Crenarchaeota, Euryarchaeota, Korarchaeota or Nanoarchaeota.
  • the Euryarchaeota is a Halobacteria, Methanobacteria, Methanococci, Methanomicrobia, Methanosarcinae, Methanopyri, Archeoglobi, Thermoplasmata , or a Thermococci .
  • Specific, non-limiting examples of archaebacteria include: Aeropyrum pernix, Methanococcus jannaschii, Halobacterium marismortui , and Thermoplasma acidophilum.
  • the prokaryote is an Eubacteria.
  • the Eubacteria may be, for example, an Actinobacteria, Aquificae, Bacteroidetes, Green sulfur bacteria, Chlamydiae, Verrucomicrobia, Chloroflexi, Chrysiogenetes, Cyanobacteria, Deferribacteres, Deinococcus-Thermus, Dictyoglomi, Fibrobacteres/Acidobacteria, Firmicutes, Fusobacteria, Gemmatimonadetes, Nitrospirae, Omnibacteria, Planctomycetes, Proteobacteria, Spirochaetes, Thermodesulfobacteria, or Thermotogae.
  • Actinobacteria include bacteria of the genera Actinomyces, Arthrobacter, Corynebacterium, Frankia, Micrococcus, Micromonospora, Mycobacterium, Propionibacterium , and Streptomyces .
  • Specific examples of Actinobacteria include Mycobacterium leprae, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Corynebacterium glutamicum, Propionibacterium acnes , and Rhodococcus equi.
  • Non-limiting examples of Aquificae include bacteria of the genera Aquifex, Hydrogenivirga, Hydrogenobacter, Hydrogenobaculum, Thermocrinis, Hydrogenothermus, Persephonella, Sulfurihydrogenibium, Balnearium, Desulfurobacterium , and Thermovibrio .
  • Non-limiting examples of Firmicutes include bacteria of the genera Bacilli, Clostridia , and Molecutes .
  • Firmicutes include: Listeria innocua, Listeria monocytogenes, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus thuringiensis, Staphylococcus aureus, Clostridium acetobutylicum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Mycoplasma genitalium, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycoplasma pulmonis, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Streptococcus mutans, Lactococcus lactis, and Enterococcus faecalis.
  • Non-limiting examples of ChlamydiaeNerrucomicrobia include bacteria such as Chlamydia trachomatis, Chlamydia pneumoniae, I Chlamydia psittaci .
  • Non-limiting examples of Deinococcus - Thermus include bacteria of the genera Deinococcus and Thermus.
  • Proteobacteria are gram-negative bacteria.
  • Non-limiting examples of Proteobacteria include bacteria of the genera Escherichia, Salmonella, Vibrio, Rickettsia, Agrobacterium, Brucella, Rhizobium, Neisseria, Bordetella, Burkholderi, Buchnera, Yersinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Shigella, Haemophilus, Pasteurella, Actinobacillus, Legionella, Mannheimia, Coxiella, Aeromonas, Francisella, Moraxella, Pseudomonas, Campylobacter , and Helicobacter .
  • Proteobacteria include: Rickettsia conorii, Rickettsia prowazekii, Rickettsia typhi, Ehrlichia bovis, Agrobacterium tumefaciens, Brucella melitensis, Rhizobium rhizogenes, Neisseria meningitides, Bordetella parapertussis, Bordetella pertussis, Burkholderi mallei, Burkholderi pseudomallei, Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Escherichia coli, Salmonella enterica, Salmonella typhimurium, Yersinia pestis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia enterocolitica, Proteus vulgaris, Shigella flexneri, Shigella sonnei, Shigella dysenterica, Haemophilus influenzae, Pasteurella multocida, Actinobacillus actinomycetemcom
  • Non-limiting examples of Spirochaetes include bacteria of the families Brachyspiraceae, Leptospiraceae, and Spirochaetaceae. Specific examples of Spirochaetes include Borrelia burgdorferi , and Treponema pallidum.
  • Tissues contemplated for use in methods and apparatuses of the invention are limited only insofar as they have cells that utilize oxygen to produce energy (and thus, are alive).
  • Tissue can be from a particular part of the body or organ, such as one from the group consisting of: heart, lung, kidney, liver, bone marrow, pancreas, skin, bone, vein, artery, cornea, blood, small intestine, large intestine, brain, spinal cord, smooth muscle, skeletal muscle, ovary, testis, uterus, and umbilical cord.
  • a particular part of the body or organ such as one from the group consisting of: heart, lung, kidney, liver, bone marrow, pancreas, skin, bone, vein, artery, cornea, blood, small intestine, large intestine, brain, spinal cord, smooth muscle, skeletal muscle, ovary, testis, uterus, and umbilical cord.
  • the tissue can contain one or more of the following cell types: platelet, myelocyte, erythrocyte, lymphocyte, adipocyte, fibroblast, epithelial cell, endothelial cell, smooth muscle cell, skeletal muscle cell, endocrine cell, glial cell, neuron, secretory cell, barrier function cell, contractile cell, absorptive cell, mucosal cell, limbus cell (from cornea), stem cell (totipotent, pluripotent or multipotent), unfertilized or fertilized oocyte, or sperm.
  • cell types platelet, myelocyte, erythrocyte, lymphocyte, adipocyte, fibroblast, epithelial cell, endothelial cell, smooth muscle cell, skeletal muscle cell, endocrine cell, glial cell, neuron, secretory cell, barrier function cell, contractile cell, absorptive cell, mucosal cell, limbus cell (from cornea), stem cell (totipotent, pluripot
  • stasis can be induced in plants or parts of plants, including fruit, flowers, leaves, stems, seeds, cuttings. Plants can be agricultural, medicinal, or decorative. Induction of stasis in plants may enhance the shelf life or pathogen resistance of the whole or part of the plant.
  • Methods and apparatuses of the invention can be used to induce stasis in tissue. This can serve to protect and/or preserve them or to prevent damage or injury to them.
  • Tissue can be better preserved for research purposes or for transplantation/implantation purposes.
  • organs can be preserved longer, survive preservation better, and/or endure less injury or damage during the preservation process or as a result of the preservation process.
  • the amount of time that organs for transplant can be preserved varies, with heart and lung being the most time sensitive.
  • the maximum amounts of time (maximum cold ischemic time) that organs are currently preserved is as follows:
  • the present invention can be used to extend these times up to 48 hours by keeping them in stasis for that long.
  • Stasis can be measured by a number of ways, including by quantifying the amount of oxygen consumed by a biological sample, the amount of carbon dioxide produced by the sample (indirect measurement of cellular respiration), or characterizing motility.
  • the biological matter is placed into a chamber that is sealed with two openings; for gas import and export.
  • Gas room air or other gases
  • gas is passed into the chamber at a given flow rate and out of the exit port to maintain approximately 1 atmosphere of pressure in the chamber.
  • the gas is passed through a carbon dioxide detector and or an oxygen detector to measure (every second) the amount of each compound in the gas mixture. Comparison of these values over time gives the rate of oxygen consumption or carbon dioxide production.
  • Oxygen metabolism is a fundamental requirement for life in aerobic metazoans. Aerobic respiration accounts for the vast majority of energy production in most animals and also serves to maintain the redox potential necessary to carry out important cellular reactions. In hypoxia, decreased oxygen availability results in inefficient transfer of electrons to molecular oxygen in the final step of the electron transport chain. This inefficiency results in both a decrease in aerobic energy production and an increase in the production of damaging free radicals, mainly due to the premature release of electrons at complex III and the formation of O 2 ⁇ by cytochrome oxidase (Semenza, 1999). Limited energy supplies and free radical damage can interfere with essential cellular processes such as protein synthesis and maintenance of membrane polarities (Hochachka et al., 1996), and will ultimately lead to cell death.
  • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas that can be toxic to animals, including humans. According to the Center for Disease Control, more than 450 people unintentionally die from carbon monoxide each year.
  • carbon monoxide presents no symptoms to humans exposed to it. However, at 200 ppm, within two-three hours the carbon monoxide can cause a slight headache; at 400 ppm, within one to two hours it can cause a frontal headache that may become widespread within three hours; and, at 800 ppm it can cause dizziness, nausea, and/or convulsions within 45 minutes, and render the subject insensible within two hours. At levels of around 1000 ppm, an organism can expire after exposure for more than around 1-2 minutes.
  • carbon monoxide can be used to induce stasis of and/or help preserve live biological samples. It is thus contemplated that carbon monoxide can be used for inducing stasis in isolated biological matter, such as blood-free biological matter (because of the effects that carbon monoxide has with respect to hemoglobin, which is a separate pathway than the one involved in inducing stasis).
  • carbon monoxide may be used in combination with agents or methods that assist in the preservation and/or transplantation/grafting process of biological materials.
  • chalcogenides Compounds containing a chalcogen element; those in Group 6 of the periodic table, but excluding oxides, are commonly termed “chalcogenides” or “chalcogenide compounds (used interchangeably herein). These elements are sulfur (S), selenium (Se), tellurium (Te) and polonium (Po). Common chalcogenides contain one or more of S, Se and Te, in addition to other elements. Chalcogenide compounds can be employed as reducing agents.
  • chalcogenides inhibit or reduce the activity of oxidative phosphorylation.
  • the ability of chalcogenides to block autonomous thermoregulation, i.e., to permit core body temperatures of “warm-blooded” animals to be manipulated through control of environmental temperatures, is believed to stem from the same mechanism as set forth above—binding to cytochrome oxidase, and blocking or reducing the activity of oxidative phosphorylation.
  • Chalcogenides may be provided in liquid as well as gaseous forms.
  • Chalcogenides can be toxic, and at some levels lethal, to mammals. In accordance with the present invention, it is anticipated that the levels of chalcogenide should not exceed lethal levels in the appropriate environment. Lethal levels of chalcogenides may be found, for example in Material Safety Data Sheets for each chalcogenide or from information sheets available from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the US Government.
  • cytochrome oxidase While carbon monoxide and chalcogenide compounds can both induce stasis by acting as an oxygen antagonist, they have different toxic effects that are separate from their abilities to induce stasis. Moreover, the concentrations needed to mediate a stasis effect are different because of the different affinities of cytochrome oxidase. While the affinity of cytochrome oxidase for oxygen is about 1:1 as compared to carbon monoxide, the affinity for H 2 S appears on the order of about 300:1 as compared to oxygen. This impacts what toxic effects are observed with a stasis-inducing concentration. Thus, it is contemplated that chalcogenide compounds are particularly suited for inducing stasis of biological matter in whole organisms and of whole organisms.
  • Hydrogen sulfide is a potentially toxic gas that is often associated with petrochemical and natural gas, sewage, paper pulp, leather tanning, and food processing.
  • Post-exposure effects may persist for years, and include loss of coordination, memory loss, motor dysfunction, personality changes, hallucination and insomnia.
  • H 2 S Most contact with H 2 S, however, occurs well below such acute toxicity levels. Nonetheless, there is general concern over longterm contact at sub-acute levels. Some reports exist indicating persistent impairments in balance and memory, as well as altered sensory motor functions may occur in humans following chronic low-level H 2 S exposure. Kilburn and Warshaw (1995); Kilburn (1999). Others have reported that perinatal exposure of rats to low (20 or 50 ppm) H 2 S for 7 hours per day from gestation through post-natal day 21 resulted in longer dendritic branches with reduced aborization of cerebellar Purkinje cells. Other neurologic defects associated with relatively low levels of H 2 S include altered brain neurotransmitter concentrations and altered neurologic responses, such as increased hippocampal theta EEG activity.
  • H 2 S Behavioral toxicity was studied in rats exposed to moderate levels of H 2 S. The results showed that H 2 S inhibits discriminated avoidance responses immediately after the end of the exposure (Higuchi and Fukamachi, 1997), and also interferes with the ability of rats to learn a baited radial arm maze task (Partlo et al., 2001). In another perinatal study using 80 ppm H 2 S, no neuropathological effects or altered motor activity, passive avoidance, or acoustic startle response in exposed rat pups was seen. Dorman et al. (2000). Finally, Struve et al. (2001) exposed rats to H 2 S by gas at various levels for 3 hours per day on five consecutive days.
  • Typical levels of hydrogen sulfide contemplated for use in accordance with the present invention include values of about 1 to about 150 ppm, about 10 to about 140 ppm, about 20 to about 130 ppm, and about 40 to about 120 ppm, or the equivalent oral, intravenous or transdermal dosage thereof.
  • Other relevant ranges include about 10 to about 80 ppm, about 20 to about 80 ppm, about 10 to about 70 ppm, about 20 to about 70 ppm, about 20 to about 60 ppm, and about 30 to about 60 ppm, or the equivalent oral, intravenous or transdermal thereof.
  • the chalcogenide atmosphere should be reduced to avoid a potentially lethal build up of chalcogenide in the subject.
  • an initial environmental concentration of 80 ppm may be reduced after 30 min to 60 ppm, followed by further reductions at 1 hr (40 ppm) and 2 hrs (20 ppm).
  • Hydrogen selenide is a key metabolite, formed from inorganic sodium selenite (oxidation state +4) via selenodiglutathione (GSSeSG), through reduction by thiols and NADPH-dependent reductases, and released from selenocysteine by lyase action (Ganther, 1999). Hydrogen selenide provides Se for synthesis of selenoproteins after activation to selenophosphate.
  • Hydrogen telluride (H 2 Te) exists as an unstable gas.
  • the reducing agent structure compound is dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylsulfide (DMS), methylmercaptan (CH 3 SH), mercaptoethanol, thiocyanate, hydrogen cyanide, methanethiol (MeSH), or CS 2 .
  • the oxygen antagonist is CS 2 , MeSH, or DMS. Compounds on the order of the size of these molecules are particularly contemplated (that is, within about 50% of their molecular weights).
  • Additional compounds that are envisioned as useful for inducing stasis include, but are not limited to, the following structures, many of which are readily available and known to those of skill in the art (identified by CAS number): 104376-79-6 (Ceftriaxone Sodium Salt); 105879-42-3; 1094-08-2 (Ethopropatine HCl); 1098-60-8 (Triflupromazine HCl); 111974-72-2; 113-59-7; 113-98-4 (Penicillin G K + ); 115-55-9; 1179-69-7; 118292-40-3; 119478-56-7; 120138-50-3; 121123-17-9; 121249-14-7; 1229-35-2; 1240-15-9; 1257-78-9 (Prochlorperazine Edisylate Salt); 128345-62-0; 130-61-0 (Thioridazine HCl) 132-98-9 (Penicillin V K + ); 13412-64-1 (Dicloxacillin Na + Hydrate
  • hypoxia is a common natural stress and several well conserved responses exist that facilitate cellular adaptation to hypoxic environments. To compensate for the decrease in the capacity for aerobic energy production in hypoxia, the cell must either increase anaerobic energy production or decrease energy demand (Hochachka et al., 1996). Examples of both of these responses are common in metazoans and the particular response used depends, in general, on the amount of oxygen available to the cell.
  • hypoxia-inducible transcription factor 1 HIF-1
  • HIF-1 hypoxia-inducible transcription factor
  • anoxia defined here as ⁇ 0.001 kPa O 2 —oxidative phosphorylation ceases and thus the capacity to generate energy is drastically reduced.
  • the cell In order to survive in this environment, the cell must decrease energy demand by reducing cellular activity (Hochachka et al., 2001). For example, in turtle hepatocytes deprived of oxygen, a directed effort by the cell to limit activities such as protein synthesis, ion channel activity, and anabolic pathways results in a 94% reduction in demand for ATP (Hochachka et al., 1996).
  • C. elegans respond to anoxia by entering into suspended animation, in which all observable movement, including cell division and developmental progression, ceases (Padilla et al., 2002; Van Voorhies et al., 2000). C. elegans can remain suspended for 24 hours or more and, upon return to normoxia, will recover with high viability. This response allows C.
  • hypoxia is still often a damaging stress.
  • mammals have both heme oxygenase-1 and HIF-1, and some evidence suggests that suspended animation is possible in mammals as well (Bellamy et al., 1996; Alam et al., 2002).
  • hypoxic damage due to trauma such as heart attack, stroke or blood loss is a major cause of death.
  • the understanding of the limitations of the two fundamental strategies for surviving hypoxic stress, remaining animated or suspending animation is hampered by the fact that it has been based on studies in a variety of systems under a variety of conditions.
  • “Hypoxia” occurs when the normal physiologic levels of oxygen are not supplied to a cell or tissue. “Normoxia” refers to normal physiologic levels of oxygen for the particular cell type, cell state or tissue in question. “Anoxia” is the absence of oxygen. “Hypoxic conditions” are those leading to cellular hypoxia. These conditions depend on cell type, and on the specific architecture or position of a cell within a tissue or organ, as well as the metabolic status of the cell.
  • hypoxic conditions include conditions in which oxygen concentration is at or less than normal atmospheric conditions, that is less that 20.8, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0.5, 0%; alternatively, these numbers could represent the percent of atmosphere at 1 atmosphere of pressure (101.3 kPa).
  • An oxygen concentration of zero percent defines anoxic conditions.
  • hypoxic conditions include anoxic conditions, although in some embodiments, hypoxic conditions of not less than 0.5% are implemented.
  • “normoxic conditions” constitute oxygen concentrations of around 20.8% or higher.
  • Standard methods of achieving hypoxia or anoxia are well established and include using environmental chambers that rely on chemical catalysts to remove oxygen from the chamber.
  • Such chambers are available commercially from, for example, BD Diagnostic Systems (Sparks, Md.) as GASPAK Disposable Hydrogen+Carbon Dioxide Envelopes or BIO-BAG Environmental Chambers.
  • oxygen may be depleted by exchanging the air in a chamber with a non-oxygen gas, such as nitrogen.
  • Oxygen concentration may be determined, for example using a FYRITE Oxygen Analyzer (Bacharach, Pittsburgh Pa.).
  • Stasis can be induced in any cell, tissue, or organism as discussed above. This includes plants or parts of plants, including fruit, flowers, leaves, stems, seeds, cuttings. Plants can be agricultural, medicinal, or decorative. Induction of stasis in plants may enhance the shelf life or pathogen resistance of the whole or part of the plant.
  • an organism or part thereof can be exposed to an oxygen antagonist for about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein.
  • hypothermic storage The two most frequently used methods for preserving/transporting hearts for transplantation are hypothermic storage and continuous perfusion.
  • the heart is arrested, removed from the donor, and then rapidly cooled and transported in cold storage.
  • the following steps are typically employed: 1) pulsatile flow; 2) hypothermia; 3) membrane oxygenation, and 4) a perfusate containing both.
  • transplant adverse consequences of wound healing may impair or prevent proper engraftment of transplanted tissue.
  • donated and recipient tissues will be treated post-transplantation with an oxygen antagonist, as discussed above with respect to wound healing, in an effort to inhibit biological processes such as inflammation, apoptosis and other wound healing/pre-transplantation events that damage engrafted tissues.
  • a saline solution containing carbon monoxide can be administered to a donor subject prior to retrieving the tissue or organ for transplantation.
  • a variety of preservation solutions have been disclosed in which the organ is surrounded or perfused with the preservation solution while it is transported.
  • One of the most commonly used solution is ViaSpan® (Belzer UW), which employed with cold storage.
  • Other examples of such solutions or components of such solutions include the St. Thomas solution (Ledingham et al., J. Thorac. Cardiobasc. Surg. 93:240-246, 1987), Broussais solution, UW solution (Ledingham et al., Circulation 82 (Part 2) IV351-8, 1990), Celsior solution (Menasche et al., Eur. J. Cardio. Thorax. Surg.
  • organ preservation specifically involve oxygen perfusion in the solution or system to expose the organ to oxygen because it is believed that maintaining the organ or tissue in an oxygenated environment improves viability.
  • Kuroda et al. (Transplantation 46(3):457-460, 1988) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,490,880; 6,046,046; 5,476,763; 5,285,657; 3,995,444; 3,881,990; and, 3,777,507.
  • Isolated hearts that are deprived of oxygen for more than four hours are believed to lose vigor and not be useful in the recipient because of ischemic/reperfusion injury. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261.
  • hypothermia temperature below room temperature, often near but not below 0° C.
  • bed rock of all useful methods of organ and tissue preservation U.S. Pat. No. 6,492,103.
  • hypothermia temperature below room temperature, often near but not below 0° C.
  • bed rock of all useful methods of organ and tissue preservation U.S. Pat. No. 6,492,103.
  • Cells, tissue/organs, or cadavers can be given compounds that enhance or maintain the condition of organs for transplantation.
  • Such methods and compositions include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,752,929 and 5,395,314.
  • methods of the present invention can include exposing biological matter to preservation solutions, such as those discussed, in addition to exposure to an oxygen antagonist.
  • any agent or solution used with a biological sample that is living and that will be used as a living material will be pharmaceutically acceptable or pharmacologically acceptable.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable or “pharmacologically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human.
  • aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art.
  • such compositions are prepared either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to use can also be prepared.
  • Organs for transplants may be monitored to assess their condition, particularly with respect to use as a transplant. Such methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,699,793.
  • a number of drugs can be administered to a patient after receiving an organ transplant to assist in the recovery process.
  • Such drugs include compounds and agents that reduce or inhibit an immune response against the donated organ.
  • organ preservation specifically involve oxygen perfusion in the solution or system to expose the organ to oxygen because it is believed that maintaining the organ or tissue in an oxygenated environment improves viability.
  • Kuroda et al. (Transplantation 46(3):457-460, 1988) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,490,880; 6,046,046; 5,476,763; 5,285,657; 3,995,444; 3,881,990; and, 3,777,507.
  • Isolated hearts that are deprived of oxygen for more than four hours are believed to lose vigor and not be useful in the recipient because of ischemic/reperfusion injury. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261.
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying oxygen antagonists and molecules that act in a like fashion with respect to inducing stasis.
  • the oxygen antagonist being sought works like a chalcogenide compound in reducing core body temperature or preserving viability in hypoxic or anoxic environments that would otherwise kill the biological matter if it did't for the presence of the oxygen antagonist.
  • These assays may comprise random screening of large libraries of candidate substances; alternatively, the assays may be used to focus on particular classes of compounds selected with an eye towards attributes that are believed to make them more likely to act as oxygen antagonists.
  • a method generally comprises:
  • a modulator may be identified as an effective modulator according to one or more assays, meaning that the modulator appears to have some ability to act as an oxygen antagonist, such as by inducing stasis in a biological matter. Screening, in some embodiments, involves using an assay described in the Examples to identify a modulator.
  • an effective modulator may be further characterized or assayed. Moreover, the effective modulator may be used in an in vivo animal or animal model (as discussed below) or be used in further in vivo animals or animal models, which may involve the same species of animals or in different animal species.
  • modulator identified according to embodiments of the invention may also be manufactured after screening. Also, biological matter may be exposed to or contacted with an effective modulator according to methods of the invention, particularly with respect to therapeutic or preservation embodiments.
  • candidate substance refers to any molecule that may induce stasis in biological matter by, for example, altering core body temperature.
  • the candidate substance may be a protein or fragment thereof, a small molecule, or even a nucleic acid molecule.
  • small molecule libraries that are believed to meet the basic criteria for useful drugs in an effort to “brute force” the identification of useful compounds. Screening of such libraries, including combinatorally generated libraries (e.g., peptide libraries), is a rapid and efficient way to screen large number of related (and unrelated) compounds for activity. Combinatorial approaches also lend themselves to rapid evolution of potential drugs by the creation of second, third and fourth generation compounds modeled of active, but otherwise undesirable compounds.
  • Candidate compounds may include fragments or parts of naturally-occurring compounds, or may be found as active combinations of known compounds, which are otherwise inactive. It is proposed that compounds isolated from natural sources, such as animals, bacteria, fungi, plant sources, including leaves and bark, and marine samples may be assayed as candidates for the presence of potentially useful pharmaceutical agents. It will be understood that the pharmaceutical agents to be screened could also be derived or synthesized from chemical compositions or man-made compounds. Thus, it is understood that the candidate substance identified by the present invention may be peptide, polypeptide, polynucleotide, small molecule inhibitors or any other compounds that may be designed through rational drug design starting from known inhibitors or stimulators.
  • modulators include antisense molecules, siRNAs, ribozymes, and antibodies (including single chain antibodies), each of which would be specific for the target molecule.
  • antisense molecules siRNAs, ribozymes, and antibodies (including single chain antibodies), each of which would be specific for the target molecule.
  • Such compounds are described in greater detail elsewhere in this document.
  • an antisense molecule that bound to a translational or transcriptional start site, or splice junctions would be ideal candidate inhibitors.
  • the inventor also contemplates that other structurally similar compounds may be formulated to mimic the key portions of the structure of the modulators.
  • Such compounds which may include peptidomimetics of peptide modulators, may be used in the same manner as the initial modulators.
  • mice are a preferred embodiment.
  • other animals are suitable as well, including rats, rabbits, hamsters, guinea pigs, gerbils, woodchucks, mice, cats, dogs, sheep, goats, pigs, cows, horses and monkeys (including chimps, gibbons and baboons).
  • Fish are also contemplated for use with in vivo assays, as are nematodes.
  • Assays for modulators may be conducted using an animal model derived from any of these species.
  • one or more candidate substances are administered to an animal, and the ability of the candidate substance(s) to induce stasis, reduce core body temperature, or endow on the biological material the ability to survive hypoxic or anoxic environmental conditions, as compared to an inert vehicle (negative control) and H 25 (positive control), identifies a modulator.
  • Treatment of animals with test compounds will involve the administration of the compound, in an appropriate form, to the animal.
  • Administration of the candidate compound (gas or liquid) will be by any route that could be utilized for clinical or non-clinical purposes, including but not limited to oral, nasal (inhalation or aerosol), buccal, or even topical.
  • administration may be by intratracheal instillation, bronchial instillation, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or intravenous injection.
  • routes are systemic intravenous injection, regional administration via blood or lymph supply, or directly to an affected site.
  • An effective amount of a chalcogenide pharmaceutical composition is defined as that amount sufficient to detectably ameliorate, reduce, minimize or limit the extent of the condition of interest. More rigorous definitions may apply, including elimination, eradication or cure of disease.
  • an oxygen antagonist which may be a gas, liquid, or semi-solid liquid
  • oxygen antagonist which may be a gas, liquid, or semi-solid liquid
  • the oxygen antagonist which may be a gas, liquid or semi-solid liquid
  • perfusing them with the oxygen antagonist (which may be a liquid or semi-solid liquid).
  • oxygen antagonist is a gas
  • the gas may be blown onto the cells, or the cells may be exposed to the gas in a closed or significantly closed container or chamber.
  • Apparatuses discussed herein can be used to expose cells to an oxygen antagonist. It is contemplated that the oxygen antagonist can be cycled in and out of a chamber or container in which the cells are, or that the amount of the oxygen antagonist to which the cells are exposed can vary periodically or intermittently.
  • Solutions of the active compounds may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant, such as hydroxypropylcellulose.
  • Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In all cases the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils.
  • polyol e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • suitable mixtures thereof e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • Proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • the prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars or sodium chloride.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • aqueous solutions For administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first rendered isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose.
  • aqueous solutions are especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intratumoral and intraperitoneal administration.
  • sterile aqueous media that can be employed will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure.
  • one dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to 1000 ml of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion, (see for example, “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” 15th Edition, pages 1035-1038 and 1570-1580).
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the active compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like.
  • carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • phrases “pharmaceutically-acceptable” or “pharmacologically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human.
  • the preparation of an aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art.
  • such compositions are prepared as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared.
  • a perfusion system for cells may be used to expose a tissue or organ to an oxygen antagonist in the form of a liquid or a semi-solid.
  • Perfusion refers to continuous flow of a solution through or over a population of cells. It implies the retention of the cells within the culture unit as opposed to continuous-flow culture, which washes the cells out with the withdrawn media (e.g., chemostat).
  • Perfusion allows for better control of the culture environment (pH, pO 2 , nutrient levels, oxygen antagonist levels, etc.) and is a means of significantly increasing the utilization of the surface area within a culture for cell attachment.
  • perfusion The technique of perfusion was developed to mimic the cells milieu in vivo where cells are continuously supplied with blood, lymph, or other body fluids. Without perfusion of a physiological nutrient solution, cells in culture go through alternating phases of being fed and starved, thus limiting full expression of their growth and metabolic potential.
  • a perfusion system may also be used to perfuse cells with an oxygen antagonist to induce stasis.
  • a perfusion system is a perfused packed-bed reactor using a bed matrix of a non-woven fabric (CelliGenTM, New Brunswick Scientific, Edison, N.J.; Wang et al., 1992; Wang et al., 1993; Wang et al., 1994).
  • this reactor comprises an improved reactor for culturing of both anchorage- and non-anchorage-dependent cells.
  • the reactor is designed as a packed bed with a means to provide internal recirculation.
  • a fiber matrix carrier is placed in a basket within the reactor vessel.
  • a top and bottom portion of the basket has holes, allowing the medium to flow through the basket.
  • a specially designed impeller provides recirculation of the medium through the space occupied by the fiber matrix for assuring a uniform supply of nutrient and the removal of wastes. This simultaneously assures that a negligible amount of the total cell mass is suspended in the medium.
  • the combination of the basket and the recirculation also provides a bubble-free flow of oxygenated medium through the fiber matrix.
  • the fiber matrix is a non-woven fabric having a “pore” diameter of from 10 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m, providing for a high internal volume with pore volumes corresponding to 1 to 20 times the volumes of individual cells.
  • the perfused packed-bed reactor offers several advantages. With a fiber matrix carrier, the cells are protected against mechanical stress from agitation and foaming. The free medium flow through the basket provides the cells with optimum regulated levels of oxygen, pH, and nutrients. Products can be continuously removed from the culture and the harvested products are free of cells and can be produced in low-protein medium, which facilitates subsequent purification steps. This technology is explained in detail in WO 94/17178 (Aug. 4, 1994, Freedman et al.), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the CellcubeTM (Corning-Costar) module provides a large styrenic surface area for the immobilization and growth of substrate attached cells. It is an integrally encapsulated sterile single-use device that has a series of parallel culture plates joined to create thin sealed laminar flow spaces between adjacent plates.
  • the CellcubeTM module has inlet and outlet ports that are diagonally opposite each other and help regulate the flow of media.
  • the amount of time between the initial seeding and the start of the media perfusion is dependent on the density of cells in the seeding inoculum and the cell growth rate.
  • the measurement of nutrient concentration in the circulating media is a good indicator of the status of the culture.
  • the timing and parameters of the production phase of cultures depends on the type and use of a particular cell line. Many cultures require a different media for production than is required for the growth phase of the culture. The transition from one phase to the other will likely require multiple washing steps in traditional cultures.
  • one of the benefits of a perfusion system is the ability to provide a gentle transition between various operating phases.
  • the perfusion system can also facilitate the transition from a growth phase to a static phase induced by an oxygen antagonist.
  • the perfusion system can facilitate the transition from a static phase to a growth phase by replacing the solution comprising an oxygen antagonist with, for example, a physiological nutrient media.
  • gases are delivered to cells, tissues, organs, organ systems or organisms.
  • the general features of systems that provide gases include a reservoir for the source gas operably connected to a chamber of sufficient size/shape to permit enclosure of the appropriate subject matter.
  • the system will also comprise means for controlling introduction of the gas, and optionally its evacuation from the chamber.
  • Such means may comprise one or more valves, pumps, fans or vents, or combinations thereof.
  • such features may be automated and controlled by computers and computer programs.
  • the delivery system 100 is suited for delivering breathable gases, including an active agent, to the respiration system of a subject. It can be modified for use with tissue instead of an organism.
  • the gas delivery system 100 includes one or more gas sources 102 . Each of the gas sources 102 is connected to a regulator 104 and a flowmeter 106 .
  • the gas delivery system 100 also includes an active agent source 107 , an optional vaporizer 108 , an outlet controller 110 , a scavenger 112 , and an alarm/monitoring system 114 .
  • the delivery system 100 may include certain elements generally used in an anesthesia delivery machine.
  • anesthesia delivery machines generally include a high pressure circuit, a low pressure circuit, a breathing circuit, and a scavenging circuit.
  • one or more of the gas sources 102 , the vaporizer 108 , the outlet controller 110 , the scavenger 112 , and/or the alarm/monitoring system 114 may be provided as part of a device having a high pressure, low pressure, breathing, and/or scavenging circuit, and these elements may be similar to those generally used in an anesthesia delivery machine.
  • Anesthesia delivery machines are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,034,753; 4,266,573; 4,442,856; and 5,568,910, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • the gas sources 102 may be provided by tanks of compressed gas; however, it should be understood that the gas sources 102 can be either a gas or a liquid source that is converted to a gas.
  • the vaporizer 108 can be used to vaporize a liquid gas source.
  • the regulators 104 include valves that reduce the pressure of each of the gas sources 102 .
  • the decompressed gas then passes through one of the flowmeters 106 , which measures and controls the flow of gas from each of the respective gas sources 102 .
  • the gas sources 102 may be carrier gases that are used to deliver the active agent 107 .
  • the carrier gases may be selected to provide a desired environment for a subject to which the active agent from the source 107 is delivered.
  • the carrier gases can include oxygen, nitrous oxide, or air in sufficient quantities to satisfy the needs of the patient.
  • Other inert or active gases may be used.
  • one of the gas sources 102 includes the active agent source 107 .
  • the active agent from the source 107 may be a liquid gas source that is vaporized by the vaporizer 108 or the active agent may be a gaseous source, such as a compressed gas under high pressure.
  • the active agent can be mixed with one or more of the gas sources 102 .
  • the outlet controller 110 controls the amount of the gas mixture that is provided to the subject.
  • the scavenger 112 is a device or system that scavenges and/or ventilates the gases that are provided to the subject.
  • the active agent from the source 107 is provided as a breathable gas to a patient, the scavenger 112 can be used to remove the waste gases of the inhalant (such as the active agent), unused oxygen, and exhaled carbon dioxide.
  • the alarm/monitoring system 114 includes sensors that monitor the gas flow and/or gas content at one or more locations within the delivery system 100 . For example, the flow or amount of oxygen may be monitored when the active agent from the source 107 is provided as a breathable gas to a patient to ensure that the carrier gases include sufficient oxygen for the patient.
  • the alarm/monitoring system 114 also includes a user interface that is configured to provide an audio or visual alarm or monitoring information to a user of the delivery system 100 , such as a visual display, a light, or audio alarm.
  • the alarm/monitoring system 114 can be configured to notify the user when a predetermined condition is met and/or to provide information regarding gas levels.
  • a system 100 A includes a high pressure circuit 116 , a low pressure circuit 118 , a breathing circuit 120 , and a scavenging circuit 122 .
  • the high pressure circuit 116 includes the compressed gas sources 102 , which are connected to regulator valves 104 b , 104 a .
  • the regulator valves 104 a control the amount of gas that flows from each of the gas sources 102 , and the regulator valves 104 b may be opened to increase the pressure of the gas, for example, by providing an opening to the surrounding atmosphere.
  • the low pressure circuit 118 includes the flowmeters 106 , the active agent source 107 , and the vaporizer 108 .
  • a gas mixture from the gas sources 102 is provided by the flowmeters 106 , which control the amount of each of the gases from the gas sources 102 .
  • the active agent source 107 is a liquid.
  • the active agent source 107 is vaporized by the vaporizer 108 and added to the gas mixture.
  • the breathing circuit 120 includes the outlet controller 110 , two one-way valves 124 , 126 and an absorber 128 .
  • the scavenger circuit 122 includes a valve 112 a , a reservoir 112 b , and an outlet 112 c .
  • a subject 130 receives the gas mixture from the outlet controller 110 and the resulting gas is ventilated by the scavenger circuit 122 .
  • the outlet controller 110 controls the amount of the gas mixture that is delivered to the subject 130 via the one-way valve 124 .
  • Expired gases flow through the one-way valve 126 to the valve 112 a and to the reservoir 112 b . Excess gases exit through the outlet 112 c of the scavenger 112 .
  • the absorber 128 may be a carbon dioxide absorbing canister for reducing carbon dioxide gases from exhaled gases. In this configuration, expired oxygen and/or active agent may be re-circulated and reused.
  • One or more sensors S may be added at various positions in the system 100 A.
  • the sensors S sense and/or monitor the gases in the system 100 A.
  • one of the gas sources 102 is oxygen
  • one of the sensors S may be an oxygen sensor configured and positioned to monitor the oxygen in the system 100 A so that the patient receives a suitable amount of oxygen.
  • the sensors S are in communication with the alarm/monitoring system 114 (see FIG. 9 ). If undesirable or dangerous gas levels are present in the system 100 , the alarm/monitoring system 114 may alert a user of the system 100 A so that appropriate action may be taken, such as increasing the oxygen levels given to the subject 130 or disconnecting the subject 130 from the delivery system 100 A.
  • a system 100 B is shown in which the active agent source 107 is connected to two of the regulator valves 104 b , 104 a .
  • the active agent source 107 is a liquid gas source
  • an optional vaporizer 108 is provided to vaporize the liquid gas source.
  • the active agent source 107 is gaseous (e.g., a high pressure gas), then the vaporizer 108 may be omitted.
  • the active agent from the source 107 is mixed with the other gas sources 102 in the low pressure circuit 118 in amounts that are controlled by the flowmeters 106 .
  • the low pressure circuit 118 includes a gas reservoir 109 that contains any overflow of the gas mixture as it flows to the breathing circuit 120 .
  • the active agent source 107 and/or any of the gas sources 102 may be provided as a liquid gas source with a vaporizer.
  • the elements of the system 100 B illustrated in FIG. 11 are essentially the same as those described above with respect to FIG. 10 and will not be described further.
  • FIG. 12 Methods according to embodiments of the present invention which may be carried out using the systems 100 , 100 A, 100 B are illustrated in FIG. 12 .
  • a mixture of one or more breathable gas sources is provided (Block 202 ).
  • the breathable gas sources may be obtained from the gas sources 102 as described with respect to FIGS. 9-11 .
  • a predetermined amount of the active agent is added to the gas mixture (Block 204 ), such as is shown with respect to the active agent source 107 in FIGS. 9-11 .
  • the gas mixture is administered to the subject 120 (Block 306 ). Exhaled gases are ventilated and/or recycled (Block 208 ), for example, by the scavenger 112 .
  • FIG. 12 are described with respect to the systems 100 , 100 A, 100 B of FIG. 9-11 , it should be understood that any suitable system or device may be used to carry out the steps in FIG. 12 .
  • Embodiments of a gas delivery system 300 are illustrated with respect to FIG. 13 .
  • the gas delivery system 300 is positioned on a subject 302 .
  • the gas delivery system 300 is particularly suited to deliver an active agent in a gas mixture to the tissue of a subject 302 , for example, wound tissue.
  • the system 300 includes a reduced pressure chamber 304 having a screen 306 that covers the treatment area of the subject 302 .
  • the reduced pressure chamber 304 is connected to a vacuum pump 310 by a pump outlet 310 a .
  • the reduced pressure chamber 304 includes an inlet 308 a and an outlet 308 b , which are in turn connected to an active agent source 307 .
  • a controller 320 is connected to the active agent source 307 and the vacuum pump 310 .
  • Reduced pressure chambers and vacuum pump systems are discussed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,645,081 and 5,636,643, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • the reduced pressure chamber 304 is configured to enclose an area of the subject 302 to provide a fluid-tight or gas-tight enclosure to effect treatment of the area with reduced or negative pressure and the active agent source 307 .
  • the pressure chamber 304 can be affixed to the subject 302 with a cover (not shown), such as a flexible, adhesive, fluid impermeable polymer sheet.
  • the cover can have an adhesive backing that functions to cover the skin around the periphery of the area being treated and to provide a generally gas-tight or fluid-tight seal and to hold the chamber 304 in position.
  • the screen 306 is positioned over the treatment area of the subject 302 .
  • the screen 306 can be positioned over the wound to prevent its overgrowth.
  • the size and configuration of the screen 306 can be adjusted to fit the individual treatment area, and may be formed from a variety of porous materials.
  • the material should be sufficiently porous to allow oxygen any other gases, such as gases from the active agent source 307 , to reach the treatment area.
  • the screen 306 can be in the form of an open-cell polymer foam, such as a polyurethane foam, which is sufficiently porous to allow gas flow to and/or from the treatment area.
  • Foams may be used that vary in thickness and rigidity, although it may be desirable to use a spongy material for the patient's comfort if the patient must lie upon the appliance during treatment.
  • the foam may also be perforated to enhance gas flow and to reduce the weight of the system 300 .
  • the screen 306 may be cut to an appropriate shape and size to fit within the treatment area, or alternatively, the screen 306 may be sufficiently large to overlap the surrounding skin.
  • the vacuum pump 310 provides a source of suction within the reduced pressure chamber 304 .
  • the active agent source 307 provides an amount of the active agent to the reduced pressure chamber 304 .
  • the controller 320 controls the amount of vacuum applied to the reduced pressure chamber 304 by the vacuum pump 310 and the amount of the active agent that is supplied to the chamber 304 by the active agent source 307 .
  • the controller 320 can apply a vacuum and/or the active agent in a substantially constant manner, cyclically, or using various fluctuations or patterns or any combination thereof.
  • the active agent is supplied by the active agent source 307 alternatively with the vacuum pumping action of the vacuum pump 310 . That is, the controller 320 alternatively activates the vacuum pump 310 while deactivating the active agent source 307 and then activates the active agent source 307 while deactivating the vacuum pump 310 .
  • the pressure in the reduced pressure chamber 304 is allowed to fluctuate.
  • a substantially constant pressure is maintained by the vacuum pump 310 and the active agent source 307 provides a substantially constant amount of active agent to the chamber 304 in the reduced pressure environment.
  • a substantially constant pressure is maintained by the vacuum pump 310 and the amount of the active agent varies in a cyclical manner.
  • the pressure in the reduced pressure chamber 304 is made to fluctuate by the vacuum pump 310 , and the amount of active agent supplied by the source 307 also fluctuates.
  • the fluctuations of either the vacuum pump 310 and the resulting pressure in the chamber 304 or the amount of active agent supplied by the source 307 may be cyclical or not cyclical.
  • FIG. 14 Methods according to embodiments of the present invention which may be carried out using the system 300 are illustrated in FIG. 14 .
  • the chamber 304 is positioned over the treatment area of the subject 302 (Block 402 ). Pressure is reduced in the chamber 304 by the vacuum pump 310 (Block 404 ). A predetermined amount of active agent from the active agent source 307 is applied to the chamber (Block 406 ).
  • the methods of FIG. 6 are described with respect to the system 300 of FIG. 5 , it should be understood that any suitable system or device may be used to carry out the steps in FIG. 14 .
  • the outlet 308 b may be omitted and the active agent may be supplied to the chamber 304 by the single inlet 308 a .
  • gases may also be added to the chamber 304 , for example, using a single inlet or an inlet and an outlet, such as is illustrated with respect to the active agent source 307 and the inlet 308 a and the outlet 308 b .
  • the vacuum pump 310 is attached to an additional collection container between the pump 310 and the chamber 304 for collecting exudates from the treatment area, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,636,643.
  • Negative pressure gas delivery systems 300 as illustrated in FIG. 13 are useful for treating a variety of areas for treatment, and, in particular, for treating wounds.
  • Wounds that may be treated using the system 300 include infected open wounds, decubitus ulcers, dehisced incisions, partial thickness burns, and various lesions to which flaps or grafts have been attached.
  • Treatment of a wound can be carried out by securing a gas delivery system to the treatment site as previously shown and described, maintaining a substantially continuous or cyclical reduced pressure within the reduced pressure chamber 304 and supplying the active agent to the chamber 304 in a substantially continuous or cyclical fashion until the wound has reached a desired improved condition.
  • a selected state of improved condition may include formation of granulation tissue sufficient for the attachment of a flap or graft, reduction of microbial infection in the wound, arrest or reversal of burn penetration, closure of the wound, integration of a flap or graft with the underlying wounded tissue, complete healing of the wound, or other stages of improvement or healing appropriate to a given type of wound or wound complex.
  • the gas delivery system may be changed periodically, such as at 48 hrs intervals, during treatment, particularly when using a gas delivery system incorporating a screen on or in the wound.
  • the method may be practiced using a negative or reduced pressure ranging from 0.01 to 0.99 atmospheres, or the method may be practiced using a negative or reduced pressure ranging between 0.5 to 0.8 atmospheres.
  • the time period for use of the method on a wound may be at least 12 hrs, but can be, for example, extended for one or more days. There is no upper limit beyond which use of the method is no longer beneficial; the method can increase the rate of closure up to the time the wound actually closes. Satisfactory treatment of various types of wounds may be obtained via the use of reduced pressures equivalent to about 2 to 7 in. Hg below atmospheric pressure.
  • Supplying reduced pressure to the gas delivery system in an intermittent or cyclic manner, such as described above, may be useful for treating wounds in the presence of the active agent.
  • Intermittent or cyclic supply of reduced pressure to a gas delivery system may be achieved by manual or automatic control of the vacuum system.
  • a cycle ratio, the ratio of “on” time to “off” time, in such an intermittent reduced pressure treatment may be as low as 1:10 or as high as 10:1.
  • a typical ratio is approximately 1:1 which is usually accomplished in alternating 5 minute intervals of reduced pressure supply and non-supply.
  • a suitable vacuum system includes any suction pump capable of providing at least 0.1 pounds of suction to the wound, or up to three pounds suction, or up to fourteen (14) pounds suction.
  • the pump can be any ordinary suction pump suitable for medical purposes that is capable of providing the necessary suction.
  • the dimension of the tubing interconnecting the pump and the reduced pressure appliance is controlled by the pump's ability to provide the suction level needed for operation.
  • a 1 ⁇ 4 inch diameter tube may be suitable.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods of treating damaged tissue which include the steps of applying negative pressure to a wound and the active agent for a selected time and at a selected magnitude sufficient to reduce bacterial density in the wound.
  • Open wounds are almost always contaminated with harmful bacteria. Generally a bacterial density of 10 5 bacterial organisms per gram of tissue is regarded as infected. It is generally accepted that at this level of infection, grafted tissue will not adhere to a wound. These bacteria must be killed, either through the wound host's natural immune response or through some external method, before a wound will close. The application of negative pressure and active agent to a wound may reduce the bacterial density of the wound.
  • Methods according to embodiments of the present invention can be used to reduce bacterial density in a wound by at least half. In some embodiments, it can be used to reduce bacterial density by at least 1,000-fold or by at least 1,000,000-fold.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods of treating a burn which include the steps of applying negative pressure and the active agent to the burn over an area with predetermined reduced pressure and for a time sufficient to inhibit formation of a full thickness burn.
  • a partial thickness burn one which has a surface layer of dead tissue and an underlying zone of stasis, is often sufficiently infected so that it will transform within 24-48 hrs into a full thickness burn, one in which all epidermal structures are destroyed.
  • the application of negative pressure and an amount of the active agent to the wound may prevent the infection from becoming sufficiently severe to cause destruction of the underlying epidermal structures.
  • the magnitude, pattern, and duration of pressure application can vary with the individual wound.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods for enhancing the attachment of living tissue to a wound which comprises the steps of first joining the living tissue to the wound to form a wound-tissue complex, then applying a negative or reduced pressure of selected magnitude and an amount of the active agent to the wound-tissue complex over an area sufficient to promote migration of epithelia and subcutaneous tissue toward the complex, with the negative pressure and exposure to the active agent being maintained for a selected time period sufficient to facilitate closure of the wound.
  • Attachment of living tissue to a wound is a common procedure that can take many forms. For example, one common technique is the use of a “flap,” a technique in which skin tissue from an area adjacent to the wound is detached on three sides but remains attached on the fourth, then is moved onto the wound.
  • Another frequently used technique is an open skin graft in which skin is fully detached from another skin surface and grafted onto the wound.
  • the application of negative pressure and active agent to the wound-graft complex reduces bacterial density in the complex and improves blood flow to the wound, thereby improving the attachment of the grafted tissue.
  • compositions of the present invention may be used in the context of a number of therapeutic applications, particularly organ transplants or skin grafts.
  • compositions of the present invention such as oxygen antagonists
  • immunosuppressants may be administered in conjunction with transplanting the organ or tissue.
  • an oxygen antagonist such as H 2 S
  • the secondary therapy is “B”:
  • oxygen antagonists of the present invention to biological matter will follow general protocols for the administration of that particular secondary therapy, taking into account the toxicity, if any, of the oxygen antagonist treatment. It is expected that the treatment cycles would be repeated as necessary. It also is contemplated that various standard therapies, as well as surgical intervention, may be applied in combination with the described therapies.
  • the atmosphere contains 210,000 ppm oxygen. Exposure to low levels of oxygen, or hypoxia, results in cellular damage and death in humans. In the nematode, C. elegans , oxygen concentrations between 100 ppm and 1000 ppm are also lethal. By critically studying the response of nematodes to a range of oxygen tensions, it was found that oxygen concentrations below 10 ppm and above 5000 ppm are not lethal. In 10 ppm oxygen balanced with nitrogen, nematodes enter into a state of reversible suspended animation in which all aspects of animation observable under the light microscope ceases (Padilla et al., 2002). In oxygen concentrations of 5000 ppm (balanced with nitrogen) and above, nematodes progress through their life cycle normally. In a search for drugs that protect nematodes against hypoxic damage, carbon monoxide was tested.
  • a glass syringe barrel having a tip with a locking device such as a LUER-LOK with the large opening of the barrel sealed with a custom-machined steel and rubber fitting to make an airtight seal was locked to via locking device to the inlet port of an environmental chamber having an inlet and an outlet port each fitted with a locking devices such as a LUER-LOK fitting.
  • a defined gas was humidified and provided to the environmental chamber by first venting the gas from a compressed tank (Byrne Specialty Gas, Seattle, Wash.) through a gas washing bottle (500 ml Kimex) filled with double distilled water. The gas washing bottle was connected to the environmental chamber past a gas-flow meter. A gas flow meter was used to provide a regulated 70 cc/min flow through the environmental chamber throughout the 24 hr incubation.
  • 2-cell C. elegans embryos, L3 larvae or adult nematodes were collected and exposed to either an environment of effectively 100% CO, an environment of 100% N 2 , an environment comprising 500 ppm oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide, or to environments comprising 100, 500 or 1000 ppm oxygen balanced with nitrogen at room temperature.
  • Nematodes were visualized using differential interference contrast microscopy (also known as Nomarski optics). Images were collected and analyzed using NIH image and Adobe Photoshop 5.5. Embryos are approximately 50 ⁇ m in length.
  • Carbon monoxide is extraordinarily toxic to humans because it strongly competes with oxygen for binding to hemoglobin, the primary molecule that distributes oxygen to tissues.
  • hemoglobin the primary molecule that distributes oxygen to tissues.
  • nematodes which do not have hemoglobin, are resistant to carbon monoxide and even protected against hypoxic damage by this drug suggested the possibility that carbon monoxide would protect against hypoxic damage in human tissue in situations where blood is not present, such as in tissue transplant or blood free surgical fields. To tested this hypothesis using human skin.
  • the foreskin tissue was preserved in keratinocyte growth medium (KGM) containing insulin, EGF (0.1 ng/ml), hydrocortisone (0.5 mg/ml) and bovine pituitary extract (approx. 50 micrograms/ml of protein).
  • KGM keratinocyte growth medium
  • EGF 0.1 ng/ml
  • hydrocortisone 0.5 mg/ml
  • bovine pituitary extract approximately 50 micrograms/ml of protein.
  • Foreskins were rinsed in PBS, and excess fatty tissue was removed.
  • Each foreskin sample was divided into 2 equal pieces. Each piece was placed into a separate container containing a solution of PBS with 24 mg/ml of Dispase II (from Bacillus Polymyxa EC 3.4.24.4:Roche Diagnostics Corp., Indianapolis, Ind.).
  • keratinocytes were isolated from the foreskins according to the method described by Boyce et al. (1983; 1985; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Briefly, the epidermis from each foreskin sample was removed to a fresh dish containing PBS. The epidermis was minced and homogenized prior to incubation in 3 ml of 0.05% Trypsin, 1 mM EDTA for 5 minutes, at room temperature, to separate basal cells from the epidermis.
  • Example 1 contains information that overlaps and extends the information disclosed in Example 1.
  • Oxygen deprivation experiments were carried out using a custom atmospheric chamber designed by W. Van Voorhies (Van Voorhies et al., 2000).
  • the chamber is a 30 mL glass syringe (Fisher #14-825-10B) fitted with a custom steel stopper that is lined with two viton o-rings to ensure a tight seal.
  • the stopper is bored through and has a steel lure lock on the exterior face so that a hose carrying compressed gas can be attached.
  • a defined gas mixture is delivered to the chamber at a constant pressure and flow rate from compressed tanks by passing first through a rotometer (Aalborg, flow-tube number 032-41ST) or mass flow controller (Sierra Instruments #810) to monitor flow rate and then through a 500 ml gas washing bottle (Fisher #K28220-5001) containing 250 ml water to hydrate the gas.
  • 1 ⁇ 4′′ OD nylon Cold-Parmer #P-06489-06
  • FEP Cold-Parmer #A-06450-05 tubing was used and connections between tubing and the regulators and between the tubing and the rotometers were made with brass John-Guest-type fittings (Byrne Gas). All other connections were made with either microflow quick-connect fittings (Cole-Parmer #A-06363-57, #A-06363-52) or standard lure fittings (Cole-Parmer #A-06359-37, #A-06359-17).
  • Viability of nematodes in carbon monoxide based atmospheres 30-60 embryos were harvested from continuously maintained Bristol N2 and hif-2(ia04) strains as described above. Environmental chambers were continuously perfused at room temperature with pure CO (grade CP) or 500 ppm O 2 /CO at 70 cc/min for 24 hrs. To achieve 2500 ppm O 2 /CO or 2500 ppm O 2 /N 2 , 5000 ppm O 2 /N 2 was mixed at a 1:1 ratio with either pure CO or pure N 2 using two mass flow controllers (Sierra Instruments 810) to precisely monitor flow.
  • Each gas was delivered into a 3-way valve (Cole-Parmer #A-30600-23) at 50 cc/min and the resulting mixture was then passed through a gas washing bottle and into an environmental chamber throughout the 24 hour exposure. All gases were supplied by Byrne Gas (Seattle, Wash.).
  • the 500 ppm O 2 /CO mixture was certified to ⁇ 2% of the oxygen content and contained 7000 ppm N 2 to ensure a consistent O 2 /CO ratio throughout the use of the tank.
  • HIF-1 has been previously reported to be required in C. elegans in mild hypoxia (0.5 kPa O 2 (Padilla et al., 2002) and 1 kPa O 2 (Jiang et al., 2001)) and suspended animation is known to be possible in anoxia (>0.001 kPa O 2 ) (Padilla et al., 2002).
  • the viability of wild-type C. elegans embryos was determined following exposure to various oxygen tensions between mild hypoxia and anoxia for 24 hrs. Embryos exposed to anoxia entered suspended animation as previously reported, and thus survived the exposure with high viability.
  • Embryos in 0.5 kPa O 2 remained animated throughout the exposure and also survived with high viability. However, embryos exposed to an intermediate range of oxygen tensions between mild hypoxia and anoxia (0.1 kPa O 2 to 0.01 kPa O 2 ) surprisingly did not survive ( FIG. 2 ).
  • Embryos did not hatch during exposure to this intermediate range of hypoxia, indicating that they did not successfully execute the HIF-1 mediated response. To determine if they appeared suspended, it was examined whether embryos in this intermediate range arrested embryogenesis during the exposure. Embryos in lethal oxygen tensions did not arrest embryogenesis, and increased amounts of oxygen correlated with an increase in the extent of developmental progression in the embryo (Table 2). Upon reoxygenation, the majority of these embryos failed to hatch and many of those that did hatch arrested as abnormal L1s. These data show that this intermediate range of hypoxia is a unique stress in which oxygen levels are neither sufficiently high to facilitate continued animation nor sufficiently low to induce suspended animation.
  • C. elegans embryos in various concentrations of carbon monoxide was first determined. Despite the toxic effects that high levels of carbon monoxide can have in some systems, C. elegans embryos was found to be remarkably tolerant to a wide range of carbon monoxide tensions. In fact, C. elegans embryos can withstand a continuous exposure to 101 kPa CO (100% CO) for 24 hrs with high viability (81.5% survival to adulthood, FIG. 3 ).
  • Viability of nematodes is also temperature sensitive, with 100% of a population being dead after a 24 hr exposure to cold temperature (4° C.; FIG. 15 ). However, if the nematodes are induced into stasis by equilibration into anoxic conditions ( ⁇ 10 ppm oxygen) for 1 hr prior to the temperature drop, a substantial proportion of them survive after a 24 hr exposure to 4° C. ( FIG. 15 ). In this experiment, the nematodes were kept in stasis during the period of hypothermia, and for one hour after they have been returned to room temperature. Anoxic conditions (pure N 2 ), growth conditions, and viability measurements are described below.
  • mice Female C57BL/6J mice (Jackson Laboratories—Bar Harbor, Me.) were implanted with telemetry devices (PDT-4000 HR E-Mitter—MiniMitter Inc.—Bend, Oreg.) according to standard protocol provided by the manufacturer. Mice were allowed to recover for several weeks to permit body temperature and heart rate signals to stabilize. Core body temperature, heart rate, and movement of the mice were continuously monitored via the telemetry devices and recorded using VitalView software (provided by MiniMitter). Ambient temperature was monitored using a HOBO (Onset Computer Corp.—Pocasset, Mass.) and the data analyzed using BoxCar software (provided by Onset Computer Corp.).
  • mice Exposure of Mice to Regulated Atmosphere.
  • Each mouse was exposed to 1 L/min of either (a) an atmosphere containing 500 ppm H 2 S balanced nitrogen (Byrne Specialty Gas—Seattle, Wash.) mixed with room air (using a 3 channel gas proportioner meter from Aalborg—Orangeburg, N.Y.) to give a final concentration of 80 ppm H 2 S and 17% O 2 , or (b) an atmosphere of nitrogen mixed with room air to give a final concentration of 17% O 2 .
  • H 2 S and O 2 measurements were taken using an Innova GasTech GT series portable gas monitor (Thermo Gas Tech—Newark, Calif.).
  • mice Prior to and during exposure to testing in regulated and unregulated atmospheres, the mice were placed in a gassing chamber comprising a glass cage (with drinking water and no food) fitted with import and export tubes of FEP tubing from Cole-Parmer (Vernon Hills, Ill.) for introduction and venting of the atmosphere.
  • the cage was sealed with a lid using Dow Corning silicone vacuum grease (Sigma—St. Louis, Mo.).
  • the gas from each cage was vented through the export tube into the chemical hood.
  • a GasTech GT portable monitor was used to detect leaks.
  • Respirometry Respirometry.
  • the consumption of oxygen was measured by use of a PA-10a O 2 analyzer (Sable Systems) which was used according to manufacturers instructions.
  • the carbon dioxide being produced by the animals was monitored using a LI-7000 CO 2 /H 2 O analyzer (Li-Cor company) used according to the manufacturers instructions. These instruments were placed in line with the environmental chambers such that they sample the gas import and export tubing.
  • mice were housed in a Shel Lab low temperature diurnal illumination incubator (Sheldon Manufacturing Inc.—Cornelius, Oreg.) to regulate both temperature and light cycle (8 AM lights on, 8 PM lights off) for the mice.
  • Mice were exposed to regulated atmosphere as described above. When the mice were exposed to the regulated atmosphere, the temperature inside the incubator was dropped to the desired temperature, for example, to 10° C. or 15° C. The mice were maintained in the regulated atmosphere and at the lowered temperature for six hours. The atmosphere in the gassing chamber was replaced with room air and the mice were returned to normal room temperature (22° C.) and allowed to recover.
  • Baseline Data To determine the response of mice to sub-lethal doses of hydrogen sulfide, the inventor first established baselines of core temperature, heart rate and movement by recording data over a one-week period from four mice with implanted transceivers in the incubator held at ambient temperature and perfused with room air. The baseline data demonstrated that the mice have a circadian rhythm with peak of activity in the evening just after the lights are turned off, and in the early morning just before the lights are turned on.
  • the core temperature varied from a high of 37° C. during their active periods to a low of 33.5° C. during their inactive periods.
  • the heart rate varied from 750 bpm (beats per minute) during their active periods to 250 bpm during their inactive periods. Heart rate is likely to be correlated with core temperature (higher temp higher heart rate). Likewise gross motor movement was highest during the evening and just before dawn.
  • the first trial of the exposure of a mouse to hydrogen sulfide involved first placing the mouse into the gassing chamber held at 27° C. in the incubator for one hour. After the hour, the chamber was perfused with 80 ppm as generally described above and the temperature of the incubator was lowered to 18° C. for the duration of the experiment. While no immediate changes in heart rate and gross motor movement were detected, a dramatic decrease in core temperature was observed. The experiment was allowed to proceed for 90 min. during which time the core temperature dropped to 28.6° C.—five degrees below the lowest recording for any of the four mice in the baseline study described above.
  • Table 4 shows results from an experiment with concurrent measurements of O 2 and CO 2 concentrations from mice exposed to room air that had had the CO 2 scrubbed (hence the 0 values for controls), with or without H 2 S (80 ppm). Measurements were over a period of 15 minutes, with the mice in a 0.5 L sealed environmental chamber with flow rates of 500 cc/min. Consumption of oxygen is obtained by subtracting the oxygen concentration when the mouse is present, from the control when the mouse is absent. Likewise, production of carbon dioxide is obtained by subtracting the carbon dioxide concentration when the mouse is present from the control when the mouse is absent. RQ stands for respiratory quotient, and is equal to the ratio of carbon dioxide produced to oxygen produced.
  • H 2 S exposure inhibits respiration in mice.
  • the different parameters of stasis can be assessed by a variety of assays and techniques. For example, probably the easiest way to measure the induction of stasis in mice administered H 2 S is through observation of their breathing. Indeed, this encompasses all three parameters in that it is indicative of decreased oxygen consumption, carbon dioxide production and motility.
  • a normal mouse in room air at standard conditions will take approximately 200 breaths per minute. If H 2 S is administered to the mouse at 80 ppm, and the core temperature is dropped to 15° C., breathing is decreased at least an order of magnitude to somewhere between 1-10 breaths per minute.
  • the inventor conducted several experiments in which a non-telemetry mouse was used, followed by exposure of a mouse bearing telemetry to acquire the data.
  • the first experiment was to subject a non-telemetry mouse to a regulated atmosphere of H 2 S at 80 ppm in a reduced cabinet temperature of 10° C. essentially as described in Materials and Methods were as above except that the mouse was placed in the gassing chamber for one hour at 27° C. prior to exposure to the gas and reduction in ambient temperature.
  • the non-telemetry mouse did well in this treatment, and recovered activity within approximately 90 min. after removal from the gassing chamber.
  • the telemetry mouse was subjected to the same conditions also did well, and showed decreased core temperature to approximately 12.5° C.
  • the inventor was unable to accurately determine this temperature because the electronics failed at 15.3° C.
  • the temperature drop to 12.5° C. is therefore an estimation based on the slope of the drop prior to failure and the time the animal remained in the chamber after failure of the electronics.
  • each of the four telemetry mice for a 6 hr period in the gassing chamber with a regulated atmosphere containing approximately 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide or with room air essentially as described above.
  • the temperature of the incubator was reduced at initiation of the experiment (exposure to the regulated atmosphere, or time 0 for the mice exposed to room air) to a constant 15° C.
  • the mice were returned to an atmosphere of room air and an ambient temperature of 22° C. as generally described above.
  • the mice were maintained for 4 weeks with no apparent change in the behavior of the animals.
  • mice While aspects of the radiation injury model can and have been evaluated in cell culture, to test the ability of an experimental drug to affect the injury and healing process requires inclusion of all of the response systems that are affected. At this point in time, the only way to achieve that is in a whole animal. The inventor is proposing the use of mice for such studies as the most appropriate model.
  • the C57BL/6 mice have been selected for study because this strain of mouse is readily susceptible to radiation lung injury, the level of radiation that is tolerated in this strain has been established, and the inventor has recently shown that H 2 S decreases the core temperature of this mouse strain.
  • mice per group will be exposed to one of four test conditions (H 2 S/17.5 Gy thoracic irradiation, H 2 S/no thoracic irradiation, no H 2 S/17.5 Gy thoracic irradiation, or no H 2 S/no thoracic irradiation), then followed for 13 weeks. Twelve animals per group will be similarly exposed and followed for 26 weeks (the increased n is required to compensate for the increased mortality that occurs late in the course of the disease).
  • ANOVA analysis of variance
  • H 2 S exposure and thoracic irradiation will be done in SLU AHR in a linear accelerator suite. Bronchoalveolar lavage and lung procurement at necropsy will be performed in the AHR mouse necropsy room. Bronchoalveolar lavage cell counts and protein concentrations and lung hydroxyproline content measurements will be performed in the another lab (D3-255). Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will receive 17.5 Gy of thoracic irradiation.
  • mice will be anesthetized with intraperitoneal Avertin, placed into individual cloth mouse restrains and irradiated via the linear accelerator with 8.5 Gy at a dose rate of 3 Gy/min through two lateral fields collimated to target the thorax only (total thoracic dose 17.5 Gy).
  • mice Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will be anesthetized for intratracheal dosing with Isoflurane. The depth of anesthesia will be monitored by respiratory rate for response to tactile stimulation. Intraperitoneal injection of Avertin (0.4-0.7 ml/mouse i.p.) will be used to anesthetize animals for the thoracic irradiation procedure. The depth of anesthesia will be monitored by respiratory rate and response to tactile stimulation.
  • mice Exposure to hydrogen sulfide. Mice will be placed into a closed plexiglass gassing chamber similar to the one used previously for mice (IR1606). The chamber will have two ports (import and export). A gas containing H2S (80 ppm) balanced with room air will be vented through the chamber at a rate of 1 liter per minute. The gas will be vented from the room using the house ventilation system with a hose that extends from the export vent to the exhaust vent for the room.
  • H2S 80 ppm
  • mice will be irradiated while they are in the gassing chamber with a total dose of 17.5 Gray using the linear accelerator. This radiation dose will induce an subacute pulmonary injury in the mice which progresses to fibrosis. The mice will not be radioactive or otherwise provide a hazard to personnel or other animals. No special monitoring, containment or disposal is required due to the irradiation.
  • Thoracic irradiation should produce a lung injury which itself is not painful but may manifest itself (week 10) by increased respiratory rate, mild appetite loss, mild weight loss and/or failure to groom.
  • the investigators and animal facility staff will monitor the animals daily for such adverse effects. If an animal does not seem to be eating, soft food and fluid support will be provided. If the animal is perceived to be in pain, analgesia with Butorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures do not lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately. Lung and esophagus tissue will be collected for histopathologic evaluation and collagen content analysis at the scheduled necropsies.
  • mice will have autoclaved cages and bedding. In addition, they will be fed standard rodent food that has been irradiated to kill pathogens.
  • Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will receive 17.5 Gy of thoracic irradiation. Mice will be anesthetized with intraperitoneal Avertin, placed into individual cloth mouse restraints and moved into a closed plexiglass gassing chamber similar to the one used previously for mice (IR1606). The chamber will have two ports (import and export). A gas containing H2S (80 ppm) balanced with room air will be vented through the chamber at a rate of 1 liter per minute. The gas will be vented from the room using the house ventilation system with a hose that extends from the export vent to the exhaust vent for the room.
  • mice Once in the gassing chamber the mice will be irradiated via the linear accelerator with 8.5 Gy at a dose rate of 3 Gy/min through two lateral fields collimated to target the thorax only (total thoracic dose 17.5 Gy). After completion of thoracic irradiation the animals will be returned to their micro-isolater cages monitored until recovered from anesthesia.
  • Thoracic irradiation should produce a lung injury which itself is not painful but may manifest itself (week 10) by increased respiratory rate, mild appetite loss, mild weight loss and/or failure to groom.
  • the investigators and animal facility staff will monitor the animals daily for such adverse effects. If an animal does not seem to be eating, soft food and fluid support will be provided. If the animal is perceived to be in pain, analgesia with Batorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures don't lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately by CO 2 asphyxiation.
  • the primary problems are likely to be esophagitis (resulting in decreased food and water intake) and respiratory insufficiency (reducing oxygen uptake).
  • the inventor will be checking these animals 2-3 times per day until they are convinced that they are stable and doing well, at which point the inventor may reduce the frequency of checks to once daily, until the disease begins to progress, at which point they return to multiple daily checks. Supportive care will be provided in several ways. If an animal is not eating or drinking well (evidenced by weight loss and grooming problems), the inventor will provide soft food and try fluid supplementation (Lactated Ringer's solution, 1-2 ml/mouse, sc using a small bore needle (>20 G), 1-2 times daily).
  • analgesia with Batorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures do not lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately by CO 2 asphyxiation. In the event that an animal experiences significant pain or distress at the time of thoracic irradiation, the animal will be euthanized by CO 2 asphyxiation.
  • a third experiment was to subject a telemetry mouse to a regulated atmosphere of H 2 S at 80 ppm in a reduced cabinet temperature of 10.5° C. essentially as described above.
  • the mouse was visually observed and its movements were recorded by web camera, and telemetry measurements were recorded as described above.
  • the mouse was exposed to a regulated atmosphere of 80 ppm H 2 S, and the temperature of the cabinet was reduced to a constant 10.5° C.
  • heat was applied to the cabinet by setting the cabinet temperature to 25° C.
  • the mouse was allowed to warm up in the regulated H 2 S atmosphere until the core temperature of the mouse was between 17° C. and 18° C. after which time the regulated atmosphere was replaced with room air.
  • Canine studies will be conducted with dogs surgically implanted with telemetry devices to monitor their core body temperature.
  • the animals will be studied in the presence or absence of a sub-lethal dose of hydrogen sulfide for 10 hrs. During this time, they will be continuously monitored for vital signs by telemetry.
  • the temperature of the environment will also be reduced to 15° C. for 30 min to determine whether this has any effect on the core body temperature of the animals.
  • the procedure will be conducted with 2 groups of 2 dogs (four total). Because of the expense of the telemetry equipment the inventor will do these experiments in succession. If the results from the first group indicate that the hypothesis is incorrect, the study will be repeated with the second group of two dogs. If the results from the second group do not support the hypothesis, the project will be discontinued.
  • the inventor induced a state of suspended animation in human tissues to protect them from lethal exposure to oxygen.
  • the inventor placed human skin in an environment of 100% CO. The inventor observes that after 24 hrs skin cells survive 100-fold better in CO than those in room air. These results are very exciting; they provide evidence that inhibitors of oxidative phosphorylation can be effective in human tissues.
  • Another set of experiments demonstrates the protective effects of induced suspended animation on platelets.
  • a unit of platelets was split in half. The first half was kept at standard storage conditions, which involves keeping the platelets at room temperature (22-25° C.) with constant shaking The other half was placed inside an anoxic environment ( ⁇ 10 ppm oxygen) using standard methods to remove the oxygen.
  • the two sets of platelets were compared on days 0, 5 and 8.
  • the platelets kept in anoxic conditions performed as well or better than those kept at standard conditions over a panel of five different in vitro tests, including the ability to aggregate, cell morphology, Annexin-V staining (phosphatidyl-serine flipping to the outer membrane as an early apoptotic marker), and so on. This indicates that controlling metabolic activity, specifically oxidative phosphorylation, can be accomplished by the removal of oxygen and has a protective effect on cellular function over long periods of stasis.
  • Hydrogen sulfide is able to bind cytochrome C oxidase as well as CO and stop oxidative phosphorylation on demand. It is so potent at impeding oxidative phosphorylation, that should a person take a single breath in an atmosphere with 0.1% hydrogen sulfide, they will not take another. Instead, they immediately collapse to the floor—an event commonly referred to in industrial settings as a “knock down.” It also appears to be reversible because, if rapidly removed to fresh air (and uninjured from the fall) these individuals can sometimes reanimate and go on to live without neurological problems.
  • an agent that is not only common in our world, indeed, is produced even in our own cells, but is also a potent reversible inhibitor of oxidative phosphorylation that does not effect oxygen delivery.
  • mice a homeothermic animal
  • Telemetry devices implanted into the peritonea of mice, can do both of these things and have the advantage of not introducing bias to the readings due to the handling of the mice (Briese, 1998). Additionally, they can remotely monitor the mice during the exposure to the hydrogen sulfide gas.
  • a dose of 80 parts per million (ppm) hydrogen sulfide has been previously shown to be innocuous to mice for exposures lasting up to ten weeks (CIIT 1983; Hays, 1972). Therefore, for these experiments the inventor used a dose of 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide to test our hypothesis.
  • FIG. 5A Exposing a mouse to 80 ppm H 2 S dropped its core temperature to approximately two degrees Celsius above ambient ( FIG. 5A ). This effect was highly reproducible as the average core body temperature of seven mice exposed to 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide for 6 hrs followed a similar pattern ( FIG. 5A ). The lowest average core body temperature of these seven mice was 15° C. in an ambient temperature of 13° C. All of these mice successfully recovered after rewarming when the atmosphere was switched to one containing only room air. As a control, the inventor substituted nitrogen for the hydrogen sulfide and did not see the substantial drop in core body temperature.
  • mice appear superficially normal despite temporary decrease in both core body temperature and breathing rate, the inventor conducted a battery of behavior tests to rule out the possibility that neurological damage was incurred by either the exposure to hydrogen sulfide gas, the extreme reduction in core body temperature, the reduction in breathing rate, or the combination of these effects. All of the tests were performed on the mice both before and after exposure to hydrogen sulfide. These behavior tests were selected from the SHIRPA protocol developed by the Mouse Models for Human Disease consortium (Rogers et al., 1997). There were no detectable behavioral differences in the mice after gas exposure. From this, the inventor concluded that entry into a hibernation-like state is not detrimental.
  • mice 8A shows that there is a significant amount of hydrogen sulfide within the mouse. Additionally, the levels of hydrogen sulfide appear to be dependent upon the ambient temperature of the mouse. Specifically, when mice are in the cold, they have reduced endogenous sulfide levels and, when mice are at warm ambient temperatures, they have increased endogenous sulfide levels. From this, the inventor concludes that mice regulate their sulfide levels in response to the ambient temperature.
  • H 2 S protects mice from hypoxia. Normal room air contains approximately 21% oxygen.
  • a mouse exposed to 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide survived 11 minutes of 5.2% oxygen and 3 weeks later, it was still doing well.
  • Previously published work shows that 90% of these animals (C57B1) exposed in this way without hydrogen sulfide do not survive (Zhang et al., 2004).
  • This experiment involved pre-equilibrating the mouse to 80 ppm H 2 S for 3 hours, then dropping the oxygen tension in the chamber as described in experiments above. The same flow rates were used as described above (i.e., 500 cc/mL in a 0.5 L chamber).
  • mice in which H 2 S is administered during periods when the oxygen tension is reduced to 4% remain viable, even for extended periods (up to an hour) in these hypoxic conditions.
  • the mice appear to be unaffected by these conditions after recovery, and are viable and normally responsive when tested 24 hours later.
  • This experiment differs from the one above in that the mice were retained in the H 2 S at the end of the hypoxic exposure until the oxygen tensions were returned to normal levels (21% O 2 ).
  • compositions and methods disclosed and claimed herein can be made and executed without undue experimentation in light of the present disclosure. While the compositions and methods of this invention have been described in terms of preferred embodiments, it will be apparent to those of skill in the art that variations may be applied to the compositions and methods, and in the steps or in the sequence of steps of the methods described herein without departing from the concept, spirit and scope of the invention. More specifically, it will be apparent that certain agents which are both chemically and physiologically related may be substituted for the agents described herein while the same or similar results would be achieved. All such similar substitutes and modifications apparent to those skilled in the art are deemed to be within the spirit, scope and concept of the invention as defined by the appended claims.

Abstract

The present invention concerns the use of oxygen antagonists for inducing stasis in tissue, including all or part of organs. It includes methods and apparatuses for achieving stasis in tissue, so as to preserve and/or protect them. In specific embodiments, preservation methods and apparatuses for preserving tissue for transplantation purposes is provided.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/972,063 filed Oct. 22, 2004 which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/557,942, filed on Jun. 8, 2004, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/548,150, filed on Feb. 26, 2004, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/513,458, filed on Oct. 22, 2003. Each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • The government may own rights in the present invention pursuant to grant number GM048435 from the National Institute of General Medical Sciences (NIGMS).
  • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present invention relates generally to the field of cell biology More particularly, it concerns methods and apparatuses for inducing stasis in isolated tissues and/or organs using a substance that competes with oxygen. In certain embodiments, there are methods and apparatuses for preserving isolated tissue and/or organs.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Stasis is a latin term meaning “standstill.” In the context of stasis in living tissues, the most common forms of stasis relate to the preservation of tissues for transplant or reattachment. Typically, such tissues are immersed in a physiologic fluid, such as saline, and placed in the cold to reduce biochemical processes leading to cellular damage. This stasis is incomplete and cannot be relied upon for extended periods. In fact, the success of organ transplant and limb reattachments is inversely related to the time the organ or limb is out of contact with the intact organism.
  • A more extreme version of stasis involves placing an entire organism into what is known colloquially as “suspended animation.” Though still considered largely within the realm of science fiction, some notoriety has been achieved when wealthy individuals have sought to be cryopreserved after death in the hopes that future medical breakthroughs will permit their revival, and cure of their fatal ailments. Allegedly, more than one hundred people have been cryopreserved since the first attempt in 1967, and more than one thousand people have made legal and financial arrangements for cryonics with one of several organizations, for example, Alcor Life Extension Foundation. Such methods involve the administration of anti-ischemic drugs, low temperature preservation, and methods to perfuse whole organisms with cryosuspension fluids.
  • The utility of inducing stasis in biological matter as contemplated by the compositions, methods or articles of manufacture described herein, is characterized by induction or onset of stasis followed by a period of time in which the stasis is maintained, followed then by reversion to a normal or near normal physiological state, or a state that one skilled in the art would recognize as a state that is better than the state of the biological matter had it never undergone stasis, in whole or in part.
  • Stasis can also be defined as what it is not. Organismal stasis is not any of the following states: sleep, comatose, death, anesthetized, or grand mal seizure.
  • There are numerous reports of individuals who have survived apparent cessation of pulse and respiration after exposure to hypothermic conditions, usually in cold-water immersion. Though not fully understood by scientists, the ability to survive such situations likely derives from what is called the “mammalian diving reflex.” This reflex is believed to stimulate the vagal nervous system, which controls the lungs, heart, larynx and esophagus, in order to protect vital organs. Presumably, cold-water stimulation of nerve receptors on the skin causes shunting of blood to the brain and to the heart, and away from the skin, the gastro-intestinal tract and extremities. At the same time, a protective reflex bradycardia, or slowing the heart beat, conserves the dwindling oxygen supplies within the body. Unfortunately, the expression of this reflex is not the same in all people, and is believed to be a factor in only 10-20% percent of cold-water immersion cases.
  • Compositions and methods that do not rely fully or at all on hypothermia and/or oxygen may be useful in the context of organ preservation, as well as for tissue or cell preservation. Cells and tissue are currently preserved using hypothermia, frequently at temperatures substantially below freezing, such as in liquid nitrogen. However, dependence on temperature can be problematic, as apparatuses and agents for producing such low temperatures may not be readily available when needed or they may require replacement. For example, tissue culture cells are often stored for periods of time in tanks that hold liquid nitrogen; however, these tanks frequently require that the liquid nitrogen in the unit be periodically replaced, otherwise it becomes depleted and the temperature is not maintained. Furthermore, damage to cells and tissue occurs as a result of the freeze/thaw process. Thus, improved techniques are needed.
  • Moreover, the lack of ability to control cellular and physiologic metabolism in whole organisms subjected to traumas such as amputation and hypothermia is a key shortcoming in the medical field. On the other hand, the anecdotal evidence discussed above strongly suggests that if properly understood and regulated, it is possible to induce stasis in cells, tissues and possible whole organisms. Thus, there is a great need for improved methods for controlling metabolic processes under traumatic conditions.
  • SUMMARY
  • Therefore, the present invention provides methods, compositions, articles of manufacture, and apparatuses to induce stasis in tissue that are not contained within an organism (“isolated tissue”). The invention is based on studies with compounds that were determined to have a protective function, and thus, serve as protective agents. Moreover, the overall results of studies involving different compounds indicate that compounds with an available electron donor center are particularly effective in inducing stasis. In addition, these compounds induce reversible stasis, meaning they are not so toxic to the particular biologic matter that the matter dies or decomposes. Such compounds can be used in methods, articles of manufacture, and apparatuses to protect, preserve, and/or extend the longevity of the tissue. Tissue in a state of stasis or that have undergone stasis can be used in a number of applications. They can be used, for example, for transfusion or transplantation (therapeutic applications, including organ transplants); for research purposes; for screening assays to identify, characterize, or manufacture other compounds that induce stasis; for testing a sample from which the tissue was obtained (diagnostic applications); for preserving or preventing damage to the tissue that will be placed back into the organism from which they were derived (preventative applications); and for preserving or preventing damage to them during transport or storage. Details of such applications and other uses are described below.
  • The present invention concerns methods for inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising: a) identifying the tissue in which stasis is desired; and, b) exposing the tissue to an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to induce stasis. Inducing “stasis” in a tissue means that the tissue is alive but is characterized by one or more of the following: at least a two-fold reduction in the rate or amount of carbon dioxide production by the biological matter; at least a two-fold reduction in the rate or amount of oxygen consumption by the biological matter; and at least a 10% decrease in movement or motility (applies only to organs that exhibit movement, such as a beating heart) (collectively referred to as “cellular respiration indicators”). In methods of the invention, stasis is temporary and/or reversible, meaning that the biological matter no longer exhibits the characteristics of stasis at some later point in time. The term “biological matter” refers to any living biological material (mammalian biological material in preferred embodiments) including cells, tissues, organs, and/or organisms, and any combination thereof. The term “in vivo biological matter” refers to biological matter that is in vivo, i.e., still within or attached to an organism. In some embodiments of the invention, biological matter is not in vivo biological matter. Moreover, the term “biological matter” will be understood as synonymous with the term “biological material.”
  • The term “isolated tissue” means that the tissue is not located within an organism. In some embodiments, the tissue is all or part of an organ. The terms “tissue” and “organ” are used according to their ordinary and plain meanings. Thought tissue is composed of cells, it will be understood that the term “tissue” refers to an aggregate of similar cells forming a definite kind of structural material. Moreover, an organ is a particular type of tissue.
  • The term “oxygen antagonist” refers to a substance that competes with oxygen insofar as it used by a biological matter that requires oxygen for it to be alive (“oxygen-utilizing biological matter”). Oxygen is typically used or needed for various cellular processes that create the biological matter's primary source of readily utilizable energy. An oxygen antagonist effectively reduces or eliminates the amount of oxygen that is available to the oxygen-utilizing biological matter, and/or the amount of oxygen that can be used by the oxygen-utilizing biological matter. Thus, in some embodiments an oxygen antagonist inhibits or reduces the amount of cellular respiration occurring in the cells, for instance, by binding sites on cytochrome c oxidase that would otherwise bind to oxygen. Cytochrome c oxidase specifically binds oxygen and then converts it to water. Preferably, the binding to cytochrome c oxidase by the oxygen antagonist is specific. In some embodiments, such binding to cytochrome c oxidase is preferably releasable and reversible binding (e.g., has an in vitro dissociation constant, IQ, of at least 10−2, 10−3, or 10−4 M, and has an in vitro dissociation constant, Kd, not greater than 10−6, 10−7, 10−8, 10−9, 10−10, or 10−11 M). In some embodiments, an oxygen antagonist is evaluated by measuring ATP and/or carbon dioxide output.
  • The term “effective amount” means an amount that can achieve the stated result. In methods of the invention, an “effective amount” is, for example, an amount that induces stasis in the tissue. It will be understood that when inducing stasis in a tissue or organ, an effective amount is one that induces stasis in the tissue or organ as determined by the collective amount of cellular respiration of the tissue or organ. Accordingly, for example, if the level of oxygen consumption by a heart (collectively with respect to cells of the heart) is decreased at least about 2-fold after exposure to a particular amount of a certain oxygen antagonist, it will be understood that that was an effective amount to induce stasis in the heart.
  • The concept of an effective amount of a particular compound is related to how much utilizable oxygen there is available to the biological matter. Generally, stasis can be induced when there is about 100,000 ppm or less of oxygen in the absence of any oxygen antagonist (room air has about 210,000 ppm oxygen). The oxygen antagonist serves to alter how much oxygen is effectively available. Thus, while the actual concentration of oxygen that biological matter is exposed to may be higher, even much higher, than 10 ppm, stasis can be induced because of the competitive effect of an oxygen antagonist with oxygen for binding to essential oxygen metabolizing proteins in the biological matter. In other words, an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist reduces the effective oxygen concentration to a point where the oxygen that is present cannot be used. This will happen when the amount of an oxygen antagonist reduces the effective oxygen concentration below the Km of oxygen binding to essential oxygen metabolizing proteins (i.e., comparable to 10 ppm of oxygen). Accordingly, in some embodiments, an oxygen antagonist reduces the effective concentration of oxygen by about 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 60-, 70-, 80-, 90-, 100-, 150-, 200-, 250-, 300-, 350-, 400-, 450-, 500-, 600-, 700-, 800-, 900-, 1000-, 1100-, 1200-, 1300-, 1400-, 1500-, 1600-, 1700-, 1800-, 1900-, 2000-, 2100-, 2200-, 2300-, 2400-, 2500-, 2600-, 2700-, 2800-, 2900-, 3000-, 3100-, 3200-, 3300, 3400-, 3500-, 3600-, 3700-, 3800-, 3900-, 4000-, 4100-, 4200-, 4300-, 4400-, 4500-, 5000-, 6000-, 7000-, 8000-, 9000-, or 10000-fold or more, or any range derivable therein. It is understood that this is another way of indicating a decrease in cellular respiration.
  • Moreover, the effective amount can be expressed as a concentration with or without a qualification on length of time of exposure. In some embodiments, it is generally contemplated that to induce stasis, tissue is exposed to an oxygen antagonist for about, at least about, or at most about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein. Thereafter, biological matter may continue to be exposed to an oxygen antagonist, or, in other embodiments of the invention, the biological matter may no longer be exposed to the oxygen antagonist. This latter step can be achieved either by removing or effectively removing the oxygen antagonist from the presence of the biological matter, or the biological matter may be removed from an environment containing the oxygen antagonist.
  • Therefore, in some embodiments of the invention, stasis is induced, and a further step in methods of the invention is to maintain tissue in a state of stasis. This can be accomplished by continuing to expose tissue to an oxygen antagonist and/or exposing the tissue to a non-physiological or controlled temperature. Alternatively, the tissue may be placed in a preservation agent or solution, or be exposed to normoxic or hypoxic conditions. It is contemplated that tissue may be maintained in stasis for about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein.
  • The term “expose” is used according to its ordinary meaning to indicate that biological matter is subjected to an oxygen antagonist. This can be achieved in some embodiments by contacting biological matter with an oxygen antagonist. Exposing tissue to an oxygen antagonist can be by incubation in or with (includes immersion) the antagonist, perfusion or infusion with the antagonist, injection of the tissue with an oxygen antagonist, or applying an oxygen antagonist to the tissue/organ or to a surface on which the tissue/organ lays and/or are in close proximity to. These are all ways in which the oxygen antagonist is administered to isolated tissue.
  • In some embodiments, an effective amount is characterized as a sublethal dose of the oxygen antagonist. A “sublethal dose” means a single administration of the oxygen antagonist that is less than half of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cells in the tissue to die within 24 hours of the administration. In other embodiments, an effective amount is characterized as a near-lethal dose of the oxygen antagonist. A “near lethal dose” means a single administration of the oxygen antagonist that is within 25% of the amount of the inhibitor that would cause at least a majority of cells of the tissue to die within 24 hours of the administration. In some embodiments a sublethal dose is administered by administering a predetermined amount of the oxygen antagonist to the biological material.
  • In some embodiments an effective amount is administered by monitoring, alone or in combination, the amount of oxygen antagonist administered, monitoring the duration of administration of the oxygen antagonist, monitoring a physiological response (e.g., pulse, respiration, pain response, movement or motility, etc.) of the biological material to the administration of the oxygen antagonist and reducing, interrupting or ceasing administration of the oxygen antagonist when a predetermined floor or ceiling for a change in that response is measured, etc. Moreover, these steps can be employed additionally in any method of the invention.
  • In certain embodiments, biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that reduces the rate or amount of carbon dioxide production by the biological matter at least 2-fold, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 100-, 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-fold of more, or any range derivable therein. In still further embodiments, biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that reduces the rate or amount of oxygen consumption by the biological matter at least 2-fold, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, 15-, 20-, 25-, 30-, 35-, 40-, 45-, 50-, 100-, 200-, 300-, 400-, 500-fold of more, or any range derivable therein. In still further embodiments, biological matter is exposed to an amount of an oxygen antagonist that decreases movement or motility by at least 10%, but also by about, at least about, or at most about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 99, or 100%, or any range derivable therein.
  • Additionally, in some embodiments of the invention, methods are provided for reducing cellular respiration, which may or may not be as high as that needed to reach stasis. A reduction in oxygen consumption by about, at least about, or at most about 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100% is provided in methods of the invention. This can also be expressed and assessed in terms of any cellular respiration indicator.
  • It is contemplated that biological matter may be exposed to one or more oxygen antagonists more than one time. It is contemplated that biological matter may be exposed to one or more oxygen antagonists 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more times, meaning when a biological matter is exposed multiple times that there are periods of respite (with respect to exposure to the oxygen antagonist) in between.
  • In some cases a sublethal collective dose or a nonlethal collective dose is administered to the biological matter. As discussed above, with respect to inducing stasis in biological matter that is not an entire organism, a “sublethal collective dose” means an amount of multiple administrations of the oxygen antagonist that collectively is less than half of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cell(s) to die within 24 hours of one of the administrations. In other embodiments, an effective amount is characterized as a near-lethal dose of the oxygen antagonist. Likewise, a “near lethal collective dose” means an amount of multiple administrations of the oxygen antagonist that is within 25% of the amount of the oxygen antagonist that would cause at least a majority of cell(s) to die within 24 hours of the one of the administrations. It is contemplated that multiple doses can be administered so as to induce stasis in the whole organism. The definition for “sub-lethal collective dose” and “near-lethal collective dose” can be extrapolated based on the individual doses discussed earlier for stasis in whole organisms.
  • It is contemplated that the tissue can be from any source that has oxygen-utilizing cells. More particularly, in some embodiments, the tissue is from a mammal. Mammals from which tissue can be used with the invention include, but are not limited to those that are from a: human, monkey, mouse, rat, rabbit, hamster, goat, pig, dog, cat, ferret, cow, sheep, and horse.
  • Moreover, tissue can be selected from the group consisting of: heart, lung, kidney, liver, bone marrow, pancreas, skin, bone, vein, artery, cornea, blood, small intestine, large intestine, larynx, brain, spinal cord, smooth muscle, nerves, skeletal muscle, ovary, testis, uterus, and umbilical cord. All or part of a number of these organs are used for transplantation purposes. Moreover, it is contemplated that a combination of different types of tissue may be used in methods of the invention. For example, transplant of a hand involves different tissues and different cell types.
  • Biological matter may be exposed to or contacted with more than one oxygen antagonist. Biological matter may be exposed to at least one oxygen antagonist, including 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more oxygen antagonists, or any range derivable therein. With multiple oxygen antagonists, the term “effective amount” refers to the collective amount of oxygen antagonists. For example, the biological matter may be exposed to a first oxygen antagonist and then exposed to a second oxygen antagonist. Alternatively, biological matter may be exposed to more than one oxygen antagonists at the same time or in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, it is contemplated that more than one oxygen antagonist may be comprised or mixed together, such as in a single composition to which biological matter is exposed.
  • Methods and apparatuses of the invention involve a protective agent, that in some embodiments is an oxygen antagonist. In still further embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is a reducing agent.
  • In still further embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is a chalcogenide compound. In certain embodiments, the chalcogenide compound comprises sulfur, while in others, it comprises selenium, tellurium, or polonium. In certain embodiments, a chalcogenide compound contains one or more exposed sulfide groups. It is contemplated that this chalcogenide compounds contains 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or more exposed sulfide groups, or any range derivable therein. In particular embodiments, such a sulfide-containing compound is CS2 (carbon disulfide).
  • Moreover, in some methods of the invention, stasis is induced in the tissue/organ by exposing the tissue/organ to a reducing agent that has a chemical structure of
  • Figure US20120052479A1-20120301-C00001
  • wherein X is N, O, Po, S, Se, or Te;
  • wherein Y is N or O;
  • wherein R1 is H, C, lower alkyl, a lower alcohol, or CN;
  • wherein R2 is H, C, lower alkyl, or a lower alcohol, or CN;
  • wherein n is 0 or 1;
  • wherein m is 0 or 1;
  • wherein k is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; and,
  • wherein p is 1 or 2.
  • The terms “lower alkyl” and “lower alcohol” are used according to their ordinary meanings and the symbols are the ones used to refer to chemical elements. This chemical structure will be referred to as the “reducing agent structure” and any compound having this structure will be referred to as a reducing agent structure compound. In additional embodiments, k is 0 in the reducing agent structure. Moreover, in other embodiments, the R1 and/or R2 groups can be an amine or lower alkyl amine. In others, R1 and/or R2 could be a short chain alcohol or a short chain ketone. Additionally, R1 and R2 may be bridged and/or the compound may be a cyclic compound. In still further embodiments, X may also be a halogen. The term “lower” is meant to refer to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms, or any range derivable therein. Moreover, R1 and/or R2 may be other small organic groups, including, C2-C5 esters, amides, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, ethers, nitriles, anhydrides, halides, acyl halides, sulfides, sulfones, sulfonic acids, sulfoxides, and/or thiols. Such substitutions are clearly contemplated with respect to R1 and/or R2. In certain other embodiments, R1 and/or R2 may be short chain versions of the small organic groups discussed above. “Short chain” means 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 carbon molecules, or any range derivable therein.
  • It is contemplated that the reducing agent structure compound can be a chalcogenide compound in some cases. In certain embodiments, the chalcogenide compound has an alkyl chain with an exposed chalcogenide. In others, the chalcogenide compound has a chalcogenide that becomes exposed once it is taken up by the biological matter. In this respect, the chalcogenide compound is similar to a prodrug as an oxygen antagonist. Therefore, one or more sulfur, selenide, oxygen, tellurium, polonium, or ununhexium molecules on the compound becomes available subsequent to exposure of the biological matter to the chalcogenide compound. In this context, “available” means that the sulfur, selenide, oxygen, tellurium, polonium, or ununhexium will retain an electron.
  • In still further embodiments, the reducing agent structure compound is selected from the group consisting of H2S, H2Se, H2Te, and H2Po. In some cases, the reducing agent structure has an X that is an S. In others, X is Se, or X is Te, or X is Po, or X is O. Furthermore, k in the reducing agent structure is 0 or 1 in some embodiments. In certain embodiments, the reducing agent structure compound is dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylsulfide (DMS), carbon monoxide, methylmercaptan (CH3SH), mercaptoethanol, thiocyanate, hydrogen cyanide, methanethiol (MeSH), or dimethylsulfide (CS2). In particular embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is H2S, H2Se, CS2, MeSH, or DMS. Compounds on the order of the size of these molecules are particularly contemplated (that is, within 50% of the average of their molecular weights).
  • Moreover, it will be generally understood that any compound discussed herein as an oxygen antagonist can be provided in prodrug form to the biological matter, meaning that the biological matter or other substance(s) in the environment of the biological matter alters the prodrug into its active form, that is, into an oxygen antagonist.
  • The oxygen antagonist is provided to the tissue/organ in a state that allows the antagonist to compete with oxygen. The oxygen antagonist may be a gas, semi-solid liquid (such as a gel or paste), liquid, or solid. It is contemplated that biological matter may be exposed to more than one oxygen antagonist and/or to an oxygen antagonist in more than one state.
  • In certain embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is a gas. In particular embodiments, the gaseous oxygen antagonist includes carbon monoxide, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, or polonium, or a mixture thereof. Moreover, it is specifically contemplated that an oxygen antagonist is a chalcogenide compound as a gas. In some embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is in a gas mixture comprising more than one gas. The other gas(es) is a non-toxic and/or a non-reactive gas in some embodiments. In some embodiments, the other gas is a noble gas (helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, radon, or ununoctium), nitrogen, nitrous oxide, hydrogen, or a mixture thereof.
  • In some instances, the gas mixture also contains oxygen. An oxygen antagonist gas is mixed with oxygen to form an oxygen gas mixture in other embodiments of the invention. Specifically contemplated is an oxygen gas mixture in which the amount of oxygen in the oxygen gas mixture is less than the total amount of all other gas or gases in the mixture.
  • In some embodiments, the oxygen antagonist gas is carbon monoxide and the amount of carbon monoxide is about the same or exceeds any amount of oxygen in the oxygen gas mixture. In particular embodiments, carbon monoxide is employed with blood-free biological matter. The term “blood-free biological matter” refers to cells and organs whose oxygenation is not dependent, or no longer dependent, on the vasculature, such as an organ for transplant. Preferably, the atmosphere will be 100% CO, but as will be evident to one skilled in the art, the amount of CO may be balanced with gases other than oxygen providing that the amount of usable oxygen is reduced to a level that prevents cellular respiration. In this context, the ratio of carbon monoxide-to-oxygen is preferably 85:15 or greater, 199:1 or greater or 399:1 or greater. In certain embodiments, the ratio is about, at least about, or at most about 1:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 6:1, 7:1, 8:1, 9:1, 10:1, 15:1, 20:1, 25:1, 30:1, 35:1, 40:1, 45:1, 50:1, 55:1, 60:1, 65:1, 70:1, 75:1, 80:1, 85:1, 90:1, 95:1, 100:1, 110:1, 120:1, 130:1, 140:1, 150:1, 160:1, 170:1, 180:1, 190:1, 200:1, 210:1, 220:1, 230:1, 240:1, 250:1, 260:1, 270:1, 280:1, 290:1, 300:1, 310:1, 320:1, 330:1, 340:1, 350:1, 360:1, 370:1, 380:1, 390:1, 400:1, 410:1, 420:1, 430:1, 440:1, 450:1, 460:1, 470:1, 480:1, 490:1, 500:1 or more, or any range derivable therein.
  • In still further embodiments, the above numbers pertain to the ratio of carbon monoxide to a mixture of oxygen and one or more other gases. In some cases, it is contemplated that the other gas is a nonreactive gas such as nitrogen (N2). Thus, in other embodiments of the invention, the above numbers apply to ratios of carbon monoxide to a combination of oxygen and nitrogen (O2/N2) that can be used in methods and apparatuses of the invention. Accordingly, it will be understood that other gases may or may not be present. In some embodiments, the CO:oxygen ratio is balanced with one or more other gases (non-carbon monoxide and non-oxygen gases). In particular embodiments, the CO:oxygen ratio is balanced with nitrogen. In still further embodiments, the amount of CO is a ratio of CO compared to room air, as is described by the numbers above.
  • In some cases, the amount of carbon monoxide is relative to the amount of oxygen, while in others, it is an absolute amount. For example, in some embodiments of the invention, the amount of oxygen is in terms of “parts per million (ppm)” which is a measure of the parts in volume of oxygen in a million parts of air at standard temperature and pressure of 20° C. and one atmosphere pressure and the balance of the gas volume is made up with carbon monoxide. In this context, the amount of carbon monoxide to oxygen is related in terms of parts per million of oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide. It is contemplated that the atmosphere to which the biological material is exposed or incubated may be at least 0, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 1000, or 2000 parts per million (ppm) of oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide and in some cases carbon monoxide mixed with a non-toxic and/or non-reactive gas The term “environment” refers to the immediate environment of the biological matter, that is, the environment with which it is in direct contact. Thus, the biological matter must be directly exposed to carbon monoxide, and it is insufficient that a sealed tank of carbon monoxide be in the same room as the biological matter and be considered to be incubated an “environment” according to the invention. Alternatively, the atmosphere may be expressed in terms of kPa. It is generally understood that 1 million parts=101 kPa at 1 atmosphere. In embodiments of the invention, the environment in which a biological material is incubated or exposed to is about, at least about, or at most about 0.001, 0.005, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04, 0.05, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.10, 0.11, 0.12, 0.13, 0.14, 0.15, 0.16, 0.17, 0.18, 0.19, 0.20, 0.21, 0.22, 0.23, 0.24, 0.25, 0.26, 0.27, 0.28, 0.29, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.5, 0.90, 0.95, 1.0 kPa or more O2, or any range derivable therein. As described above, such levels can be balanced with carbon monoxide and/or other non-toxic and/or non-reactive gas(es) Also, the atmosphere may be defined in terms of CO levels in kPa units. In certain embodiments, the atmosphere is about, at least about, or at most about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 101, 101.3 kPa CO, or any range derivable therein. In particular embodiments, the partial pressure is about or at least about 85, 90, 95, 101, 101.3 kPa CO, or any range derivable therein.
  • The amount of time the sample is incubated or exposed to carbon monoxide can also vary in embodiments of the invention. In some embodiments, the sample is incubated or exposed to carbon monoxide for about, for at least about, or for at most about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60 or more minutes and/or, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, hours, and/or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more days.
  • Biological matter is exposed to the gas in a closed container in some embodiments of the invention. In some cases, the closed container can maintain a particular environment or modulate the environment as is desired. The environment refers to the amount of oxygen antagonist that the biological matter is exposed and/or the temperature of the environment. In some cases, the biological matter is placed under a vacuum before, during, or after exposure to an oxygen antagonist. Moreover, in other cases, the biological matter is exposed to a normoxic environment after being exposed to an oxygen antagonist.
  • Moreover, in other embodiments, the environment containing the biological matter cycles at least once to a different amount or concentration of the oxygen antagonist, wherein the difference in amount or concentration is by at least one percentage difference. The environment may cycle back and forth between one or more amounts or concentrations of the oxygen antagonist, or it may gradually increase or decrease the amount or concentrations of an oxygen antagonist. In some cases, the different amount or concentration is between about 0 and 99.9% of the amount or concentration of the oxygen antagonist to which the biological matter was initially exposed. It is contemplated that the difference in amount and/or concentration is about, at least about, or at most about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99% or more, or any range derivable therein.
  • Methods of the invention can also include a step of subjecting biological matter to a controlled temperature environment. In certain embodiments, the biological matter is exposed to a temperature that is a “non-physiological temperature environment,” which refers to a temperature in which the biological matter cannot live in for more than 96 hours. The controlled temperature environment can have a temperature of about, at least about, or at most about −210, −200, −190, −180, −170, −160, −150, −140, −130, −120, −110, −100, −90, −80, −70, −60, −50, −40, −30, −20, −10, −5, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200° C. or more, or any range derivable therein. Biological matter may also be exposed to an oxygen antagonist at room temperature, which means a temperature between about 20° C. and about 25° C. Furthermore, it is contemplated the biological matter achieves a core temperature of any amount or range of amounts discussed.
  • It is contemplated that the biological matter can be subjected to a non-physiological temperature environment or a controlled temperature environment during or after exposure to the oxygen antagonist(s). Furthermore, in some embodiments, the biological matter is subjected to a non-physiological temperature environment or a controlled temperature environment for a period of time between about one minute and about one year. The amount of time may be about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein. Moreover, there may also be a step of increasing the ambient temperature relative to the reduced temperature.
  • Moreover, it is contemplated that the temperature may be altered or cycled during the process. In some embodiments, the temperature of the biological matter may first be reduced before it is placed in the environment that has the oxygen antagonist, while in others, the biological matter may be cooled by placing it in the oxygen antagonist environment, that is below the temperature of the biological matter. The biological matter and/or environment may be cooled or heated gradually, such that the temperature of the biological matter or environment starts at one temperature but then reaches another temperature.
  • In certain embodiments, methods include modulating environmental oxygen levels or removing the biological material from an environment having oxygen. Operationally, exposing biological material to an environment in which oxygen is diminished or absent may mimic exposure of the biological material to an oxygen antagonist.
  • In methods of the invention, there also is a step of assessing the level of the oxygen antagonist and/or oxidative phosphorylation in the biological matter in which stasis was induced.
  • Compositions, methods, and articles of manufacture of the invention can be used on biological matter that will be transferred back into the donor organism from which it was derived (autologous) or a different recipient (heterologous) subject. In some embodiments, biological matter is obtained directly from a donor organism. In others, the biological matter is placed in culture prior to exposure to an oxygen antagonist. In some situations, the biological matter is obtained from a donor organism administered extracorporeal membrane oxygenation prior to retrieval of the biological matter, which is a technique implemented to aid in the preservation of biological matter. Moreover, methods include administering or implanting the biological matter in which stasis was induced to a live recipient organism.
  • In preferred embodiments, an organ or tissue to be retrieved and then transplanted is exposed to the oxygen antagonist while still in the donor subject. It is contemplated that in some cases, the vasculature of the donor is used to expose the organ or tissue to the oxygen antagonist. This can be done if the heart is still pumping or a pump, catheter, or syringe can be used to administer the oxygen antagonist into the vasculature for delivery to the organ or tissue
  • Methods of the invention also concern inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising incubating the tissue with an oxygen antagonist that creates hypoxic conditions for an effective amount of time for the tissue to enter stasis.
  • Furthermore, other embodiments of the invention include methods of reducing oxygen demand in isolated tissue comprising contacting the tissue with an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to reduce its oxygen demand. It is contemplated that oxygen demands is reduced about, at least about, or at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, or 100%, or any range derivable therein, with respect to the amount of oxygen demand in the cells of the tissue or a representative sample of cells not exposed or no longer exposed to the oxygen antagonist.
  • Other aspects of the invention concern methods for preserving a tissue that is separate from an organism comprising contacting the tissue with an effective amount of an oxygen antagonist to preserve the majority of cells constituting the tissue. In the case of tissues from a recently deceased organism, it is contemplated that the tissues may be exposed to the oxygen antagonist within about or within at least about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4 hours or more, and any combination or range derivable therein, of its being retrieved (separated) from the deceased organism.
  • The invention also concerns a method for inducing stasis in isolated tissue comprising incubating the tissue with an oxygen antagonist for an effective amount of time to render conditions hypoxic induce the tissue to enter stasis.
  • In certain embodiments of the invention, there is a method for delaying the effects of a trauma on the tissue comprising exposing the tissue to a sub-lethal dose of an oxygen antagonist. In other aspects, there is a method for preserving tissue ex vivo comprising contacting the tissue with a sub-lethal dose of a chalcogenide compound.
  • Methods of the invention can involve employing an apparatus or system that maintains the environment in which biological matter is placed or exposed to. The invention includes an apparatus in which an oxygen antagonist, particularly as a gas, is supplied. In some embodiments, the apparatus includes a container with a sample chamber for holding the biological matter, wherein the container is connected to a supply of gas comprising the oxygen antagonist(s). It is specifically contemplated that the container may be a solid container or it may flexible, such as a bag.
  • In some embodiments, the invention is an apparatus for preserving tissue/organ, the apparatus comprising: a container having a sample chamber with a volume of no greater than 775 liters; and a first gas supply in fluid communication with the sample chamber, the first gas supply including carbon monoxide. In further embodiments, the apparatus also includes a cooling unit that regulates the temperature inside the sample chamber and/or a gas regulator that regulates the amount of oxygen antagonist in the chamber or the amount of oxygen antagonist in a solution that is in the chamber.
  • It is contemplated that there may be a gas supply for a second or additional gas or a second or additional gas supply for the oxygen antagonist. The second gas supply may be connected with the sample chamber or it may be connected with the first gas supply. The additional gas, as discussed above, may be a non-toxic and/or non-reactive gas.
  • A gas regulator is part of the apparatus in some embodiments of the invention. One, two, three, or more gas regulators may be employed. In some cases, the gas regulator regulates the gas supplied to the sample chamber from the first gas supply. Alternatively, it regulates the gas supplied to the sample chamber or first gas supply from the second gas supply, or there may be a regulator for both the first and second gas supplies. It is further contemplated that any gas regulator can be programmed to control the amount of gas supplied to the sample chamber and/or to another gas supply. The regulation may or may not be for a specified period of time. There may be a gas regulator, which may or may not be programmable, for any gas supply directly or indirectly connected to the sample chamber. In some cases, the gas regulator is electronically programmable.
  • In some cases, the pressure and/or the temperature inside the chamber can be regulated with either a pressure regulator or temperature regulator, respectively. As with the gas regulator, these regulators may be electronically programmable. The apparatus of the invention may also have a cooling and/or heating unit to achieve the temperatures discussed above. The unit may or may not be electronically programmable.
  • In additional embodiments, the apparatus includes a wheeled cart on which the container rests or it may have one or more handles.
  • It is specifically contemplated that the invention includes an apparatus for cell(s), in which the apparatus has: a container having a sample chamber; a first gas supply in fluid communication with the sample chamber, the first gas supply including the oxygen antagonist(s); and an electronically-programmable gas regulator that regulates gas supplied to the sample chamber from the first gas supply.
  • In some embodiments, the apparatus also has a structure configured to provide a vacuum within the sample chamber.
  • Moreover, any oxygen antagonist described in this application is contemplated for use with apparatuses of the invention. In specific embodiments, carbon monoxide can be administered using this apparatus. In other cases, a chalcogenide compound can be administered or a compound having the reducing agent structure.
  • Additionally, the present invention concerns screening assays. In some embodiments, a candidate substance is screened for the ability to act as an oxygen antagonist. This can be done using any assay described herein, such as by measuring carbon dioxide output. Any substance identified as having exhibiting characteristics of an oxygen antagonist can be further characterized or tested. Moreover, it is contemplated that such a substance can be administered to biological matter to induce stasis or manufactured thereafter.
  • It will be understood that any oxygen antagonist can be used in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of any disease or condition requiring implantation or transplantation of live tissue, such as for treating myocardial ischemia, loss of an organ or organ function, loss of a limb, loss of eyesight, loss of vocal abilities, cancer (including leukemia), neurodegenerative diseases or conditions, bowel diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney diseases or conditions, eye diseases or conditions, heart diseases or conditions, liver diseases or conditions, kidney and/or pancreas diseases or conditions, nerve damage or loss, larynx diseases or conditions, lung diseases or conditions, uterus diseases or conditions, genitourinary diseases or conditions, reproductive conditions or diseases, blood diseases or conditions, immune system diseases or conditions, burns, bone loss, skin loss, or disfiguration.
  • Any embodiment discussed with respect to one aspect of the invention applies to other aspects of the invention as well.
  • The embodiments in the Example section are understood to be embodiments of the invention that are applicable to all aspects of the invention.
  • The use of the term “or” in the claims is used to mean “and/or” unless explicitly indicated to refer to alternatives only or the alternatives are mutually exclusive, although the disclosure supports a definition that refers to only alternatives and “and/or.”
  • Throughout this application, the term “about” is used to indicate that a value includes the standard deviation of error for the device or method being employed to determine the value.
  • Following long-standing patent law, the words “a” and “an,” when used in conjunction with the word “comprising” in the claims or specification, denotes one or more, unless specifically noted.
  • Other objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed description. It should be understood, however, that the detailed description and the specific examples, while indicating specific embodiments of the invention, are given by way of illustration only, since various changes and modifications within the spirit and scope of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art from this detailed description.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The following drawings form part of the present specification and are included to further demonstrate certain aspects of the present invention. The invention may be better understood by reference to one or more of these drawings in combination with the detailed description of specific embodiments presented herein.
  • FIG. 1—Human keratinocytes survive exposure to 100% CO. Cells were inspected visually using an inverted phase contrast microscope. Quantitation of the number of viable keratinocytes as judged by trypan blue staining, which is an indicator of cell death.
  • FIG. 2—Discontinuity of survivability in hypoxia. Viabilities to adulthood were assayed following exposure to 24 hours of anoxia (pure N2), intermediate hypoxia (0.01 kPa O2, 0.05 kPa O2 or 0.1 kPa O2) or mild hypoxia (0.5 kPa O2) in wild-type embryos. All data points are the result of at least 3 independent experiments and worms that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total.
  • FIG. 3—Carbon monoxide protects against hypoxia. Viabilities to adulthood were assayed following exposure to 24 hours of pure carbon monoxide, 0.05 kPa O2/N2 or 0.05 kPa O2/CO in wild-type embryos. All data points are the result of at least 3 independent experiments and worms that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total.
  • FIG. 4A—Metabolic rate decreases before body core temperature when mice are exposed to hydrogen sulfide. Exposure of mice to 80 ppm (at 0 minutes on the X axis) results in an approximately 3 fold decrease in CO2 production (black line) in less than five minutes. This precedes the drop in core temperature of the animal toward the ambient temperature (gray line).
  • FIG. 4B-Temperature of mice exposed to hydrogen sulfide. Each trace represents a continuous measurement of core body temperature individual mouse exposed to either 80 ppm of H2S, or to room air. Numbers on the vertical axis are temperature in ° Celsius. On the horizontal axis, the numbers reflect time in hours. The experiments were carried out for 6 hours followed by recordings of the recovery. The beginning point is at 1:00, and the end of the 6 hr treatment is about 7:00.
  • FIG. 5A—Exposure to 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide causes the core body temperature of a mouse to approach ambient temperature. Gas was turned on and temperature decreased starting at time 0:00. Atmosphere switched back to room air at time 6:00. Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse as determined by radiotelemetry. This was approximately 39° C. at time 0:00. Diamonds indicate the ambient temperature which was reduced from 23° C. to 13° C. in the first 3 hours of the experiment, and then increased again toward 23° C. from hour 6:00 stabilizing at around hour 9:00.
  • FIG. 6—The rate of body core temperature drop is dependent upon the concentration of hydrogen sulfide given to the mice. All lines represent core body temperature of a single mouse as determined by radiotelemetry. Mice subjected to 20 ppm and 40 ppm H2S exhibit minor drops in core temperature. Exposure to 60 ppm induced a substantial drop in temperature beginning at approximately hour 4:00. The mouse exposed to 80 ppm exhibited a substantial drop in temperature beginning at approximately hour 2:00.
  • FIG. 7—Lowest core body temperature. The lowest core body temperature recorded for a mouse exposed to 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide was 10.7° C. Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse as determined by radiotelemetry which started at approximately 39° C. at time 0. Diamonds indicate the ambient temperature which began at approximately 23° C. and was dropped to less than 10° C. by the mid-point of the experiment, after which it was then increased again toward room temperature.
  • FIG. 8A—Endogenous levels of hydrogen sulfide are increased in mice acclimated to warm temperatures. Gray bars (two left bars) indicate endogenous H2S concentrations of two individual mice acclimated to 4° C.; black bars (two right bars) indicate the endogenous H2S concentrations of two individual mice acclimated to 30° C. Hydrogen sulfide concentration determined by GC/MS.
  • FIG. 8B—Effects of Ambient Temperature on Hydrogen Sulfide Dependent Temperature prop. The rate of core temperature (expressed in degrees Centigrade) drop due to hydrogen sulfide exposure is dependent on the acclimation temperature. The mice were exposed to the gas at 1:00. Triangles indicate the core body temperature of the mouse, acclimated to 12° C., as determined by radiotelemetry. Squares indicate the core body temperature of the animal acclimated to 30° C.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic drawing illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic drawing illustrating a respiration gas delivery system according to further embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating operations according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic drawing illustrating a tissue treatment gas delivery system according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating operations according to embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 Metabolic inhibition protects against hypothermia-induced death in Nematodes. Nematodes exposed to cold temperatures (4° C.) are unable to survive after 24 hours. However, if kept in anoxic conditions during the period of hypothermia (and for a 1 hour period before and after), a substantial proportion of the nematodes survive.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ILLUSTRATIVE EMBODIMENTS I. Stasis
  • In “stasis” or “suspended animation,” a cell, tissue or organ, or organism (collectively referred to as “biological material”) is living, but cellular functions necessary for cell division, developmental progression, metabolic state are slowed or even stopped. This state is desirable in a number of contexts. Stasis can be used as a method of preservation by itself, or it may be induced as part of a cryopreservation regimen. Biological materials may be preserved for research use, for transportation, for transplantation, for therapeutic treatment (such as ex vivo therapy), and to prevent the onset of trauma, for example. Stasis with respect to entire organisms have similar uses. For instance, transportation of organisms could be facilitated if they had entered stasis. This might reduce physical and physiological damage to the organism by reducing or eliminating stress or physical injury. These embodiments are discussed in further detail below. Stasis may be beneficial by decreasing the need of the biological material for oxygen and, therefore, bloodflow. It may extend the period of time that biological material can be isolated from a life-sustaining environment and exposed to a death-inducing environment.
  • The present invention is based on the observation that certain types of compounds effectively induce reversible stasis in biological matter.
  • A. Thermoregulation
  • Stasis in a warm-blooded animal will affect thermoregulation. Thermoregulation is a characteristic of so-called “warm-blooded” animals, which permits the organism to maintain a relatively constant core body temperature even when exposed to significantly altered (cold or hot) environmental temperatures. The ability to control thermoregulation by induction of stasis is one aspect of the invention, and permits uses similar to those discussed above.
  • Thermal regulation may be a facilitated by placing of organisms, limbs or isolated organs or tissues into chambers/devices, the temperature of which can be controlled. For example, warm rooms or chamber-like devices similar to hyperbaric chambers may encompass an entire organism and be connected to thermo-regulatory apparatus. Smaller devices such as blankets, sleeves, cuffs or gloves (e.g., CORE CONTROL cooling system by AVAcore Technologies, Palo Alto, Calif., U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,277) are also contemplated. Such chambers/devices may be used both to increase or reduce ambient temperatures.
  • B. Biological Matter
  • Biological material contemplated for use with the present invention include material derived from invertebrates and vertebrates, including mammals; biological materials includes organisms. In addition to humans, the invention can be employed with respect to mammals of veterinary or agricultural importance including those from the following classes: canine, feline, equine, bovine, ovine, murine, porcine, caprine, rodent, lagomorph, lupine, and ursine. The invention also extends to fish and birds. Other examples are disclosed below.
  • Moreover, the type of biological matter varies. It can be cells, tissues and organs, as well as organisms for which different compositions, methods, and apparatuses have relevance. The nonprovisional U.S. patent applications entitled “Methods, Compositions and Devices for Inducing Stasis in Cells” and “Methods, Compositions and Devices for Inducing Stasis in Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organisms” in the name of Mark. B. Roth filed on Oct. 22, 2004 are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • 1. Different Sources
  • The following are examples of sources from which biological matter may be obtained. Embodiments of the invention include, but are not limited to, these examples.
  • a. Mammals
  • In certain aspects of the invention, the mammal is of the Order Monotremata, Marsupialia, Insectivora, Macroscelidia, Dermoptera, Chiroptera, Scandentia, Primates, Xenarthra, Pholidota, Tubulidentata, Lagomorpha, Rodentia, Cetacea, Carnivora, Proboscidea, Hyracoidea, Sirenia, Perissodactyla, or Artiodactyla.
  • Examples of Monotremata include the Families Tachyglossidae (e.g., Echidnas) and Ornithorhynchidae (e.g., Platypus). Examples of Marsupialia include the Families Didelphidae (e.g., Opossums), Microbiotheriidae (e.g., Monito del Monte), Caenolestidae (e.g., Rat Oppossums), Dasyuridae (e.g., Marsupial mice), Myrmecobiidae (e.g., Numbat), Thylacinidae (e.g., Thylacine), Peramelidae (e.g., Bandicoots), Thylacomyidae (e.g., Rabbit Bandicoots), Notoryctidae (e.g., Marsupial Moles), Phalangeridae (e.g., Cuscuses), Petauridae (e.g., Ringtails, Gliders), Burramyidae (e.g., Pygmy Possums), Macropodidae (e.g., Kangaroos, Wallabies), Tarsipedidae (e.g., Honey Possum), Vombatidae (e.g., Wombats), and Phascolarctidae (e.g., Koalas).
  • Insectivora includes, for example, the Families Solenodontidae (e.g., Solenodons), Tenrecidae (e.g., Tenrecs, Otter Shrews), Chrysochloridae (e.g., Golden Moles), Erinaceidae (e.g., Hedgehogs, Moonrats), Soricidae (e.g., Shrews), and Talpidae (e.g., Moles, Desmans). The Order Macroscelidia includes the Family Macroscelidia (e.g., Elephant Shrews). The Order Scandentia includes Tupaiidae (e.g., Tree Shrews). The Order Dermoptera includes the Family Cynocephalidea (e.g., Flying Lemurs). Chiroptera includes the Families Pteropodidae (e.g., Fruit Bats, Flying Foxes), Rhinopomatidae (e.g., Mouse-Tailed Bats), Craseonycteridae (e.g., Hog-Nosed or Bumblebee Bat), Emballonuridae (e.g., Sheath-Tailed Bats), Nycteridae (e.g., Slit-Faced Bats), Megadermatidae (e.g., False Vampire Bats), Rhinolophidae (e.g., Horshoe Bats), Noctilionidae (e.g., Bulldog Bats, Fisherman Bats), Mormoopidae, Phyllostomidae (e.g., New World Leaf-Nosed Bats), Natalidae, Furipteridae, Thyropteridae, Myzapodidae, Vespertilionidae (e.g., Common Bats), Mystacinidae (e.g., Short-Tailed Bats), and Molossjdae (e.g., Free-Tailed Bats).
  • The Order Primates includes the Families Lemuridae (e.g., Lemurs), Chemogaleidae (e.g., Mouse Lemurs), Indriidae (e.g., Indri, Woolly Lemur), Daubentoniidae (e.g., Aye-Aye), Lorisidae (e.g., Lorises, Bushbabies, Galagos), Tarsiidae (e.g., Tarsiers), Cebidae (e.g., New World Monkeys, Marmosets, Tamarins), Hylobatidae (e.g., Gibbons), Pongidae (e.g., Apes), and Hominidae (e.g., Man).
  • Examples of Xenarthra include Myrmecophagidae (e.g., Anteaters), Bradypodidae (e.g., Three-Toed Sloths), Megalonychidae (e.g., Two-Toed Sloths), and Dasypodidae (e.g., Armadillos). Examples of Pholidota include Manidae (e.g., Pangolins). Examples of Tubulidentata include Orycteropodidae (e.g., Aardvarks). Examples of Lagomorpha include Ochotonidae (e.g., Pikas) and Leporidae (e.g., Hares and Rabbits).
  • The Order Rodentia includes the Families Aplodontidae (e.g., Mountain Beavers), Sciuridae (e.g., Squirrels, Marmots, Chipmunks), Geomyidae (e.g., Pocket Gophers), Heteromyidae (e.g., Pocket Mice, Kangaroo Rats), Castoridae (e.g., Beaver), Anomaluridae (e.g., Scaly-Tailed Squirrels), Pedetidae (e.g., Springhare), Muridae (e.g., Rats and Mice), Gliridae (e.g., Dormice), Seleviniidae (e.g., Desert Dormouse), Zapodidae (e.g., Jumping Mice), Dipodidae (e.g., Jerboas), Hystricidae (e.g., Old World Porcupines), Erethizontidae (e.g., New World Porcupines), Caviidae (e.g., Guinea Pigs, Maras), Hydrochaeridae (e.g., Capybara), Dinomyidae (e.g., Pacarana), Agoutidae (e.g., Pacas), Dasyproctidae (e.g., Agoutis), Chinchillidae (e.g., Chinchillas, Viscachas), Capromyidae (e.g., Hutias), Myocastoridae (e.g., Nutria), Ctenomyidae (e.g., Tuco-Tucos), Octodontidae (e.g., Octodonts, Degus), Abrocomidae (e.g., Chichilla Rats), Echimyidae (e.g., Spiny Rats), Thryonomyidae (e.g., Cane Rats), Petromyidae (e.g., African Rock Rat), Bathyergidae (e.g., Mole Rat), and Ctenodactylidae (e.g., Gundis).
  • The Order Cetacea includes the Families Iniidae (e.g., Amazon Popoise), Lipotidae, Platanistidae, Pontoporiidae, Ziphiidae (e.g., Beaked Whales), Physeteridae (e.g., Sperm Whales), Monodontidae (e.g., Beluga Whale, Narwhal), Delphinidae (e.g., Marine Dolphins, Killer Whales), Phocoenidae (e.g., Porpoises), Balaenopteridae (e.g., Rorquals), Balaenidae (e.g., Right Whales), and Eschrichtiidae (e.g., Gray Whales).
  • The Order Carnivora includes the Families Canidae (e.g., Dogs, Foxes, Wolves, Jackals, Coyotes), Ursidae (e.g., Bears), Procyonidae (e.g., Raccoons, Coatis, Kinkajous, Lesser Pandas), Ailuropodidae (e.g., Giant Pandas), Mustelidae (e.g., Weasels, Skunks, Badgers, Otters), Viverridae (e.g., Civets, Genets), Herpestidae (e.g., Mongooses), Protelidae (e.g., Aardwolf), Hyaenidae (e.g., Hyenas), Felidae (e.g., Cats), Otariidae (e.g., Eared Seals, Sea Lions), Odobenidae (e.g., Walrus), and Phocidae (e.g., Earless Seals).
  • The Order Proboscidea includes the Family Elephantidae (e.g., Elephants). Hyracoidea includes the Family Procaviidae (e.g., Hyraxes). Sirenia includes the Families Dugongidae (e.g., Dugong) and Trichechidae (e.g., Manatees). The Order Perissodactyla includes the Families Equidae (e.g., Horses, Asses, Zebras), Tapiridae (e.g., Tapirs), and Rhinocerotidae (e.g., Rhinoceroses). The Order Artiodactyla includes the Families Suidae (e.g., Pigs, Babirusa), Tayassuidae (e.g., Peccaries), Hippopotamidae (e.g., Hippopotamuses), Camelidae (e.g., Camels, Llamas, Vicunas), Tragulidae (e.g., Chevrotains), Moschidae (e.g., Musk Deer), Cervidae (e.g., Deer, Elk, Moose), Giraffidae (e.g., Giraffe, Okapi), Antilocapridae (e.g., Pronghorn), and Bovidae (e.g., Cattle, Sheep, Antelope, Goats).
  • b. Reptiles
  • In certain embodiments, the biological material is a reptile or is derived from a reptile. The reptile may be of the Order Chelonia, Pleurodira, Squamata, Rhynchocephalia, or Crocodylia. A reptile of the Order Chelonia may be, for example, a Carettochelyidae, Chelydridae (e.g., Snapping Turtles), Cheloniidae (e.g., Loggerhead Turtles, Green Turtles), Dermatemydidae (e.g., Leatherback Turtles), Emydidae (e.g., Painted Turtles, Pond Sliders, Pond Turtles, Snail-Eating Turtles, Box Turtles), Kinosternidae (e.g., Stinkpot Turtles), Saurotypidae, Testudinidae (e.g., Galapagos Tortoises, Desert Tortoises, Aldabra Turtles, Spu-Thighed Tortoises, Hermann's Tortoise), Trionychidae (e.g., Chinese Softshells, Spiny Softshells), or a Platysternidae. A reptile of the Order Pleurodira may be, for example, a Chelidae (e.g., Snake-Necked Turtles) or Pelomedusidae (e.g., Helmeted Turtles).
  • A reptile of the Order Squamata may be, for example, an Agamidae (e.g., Rainbow Lizards, Bearded Dragons, Indian Bloodsuckers, Spiny-Tailed Lizards), Chamaeleontdidae (e.g., Chameleons), Iguanidae (e.g., Anoles, Basilisks, Collared Lizards, Iguanas, Horned Lizards, Chuckwallas, Sagebrush Lizards, Side-Blotched Lizards), Gekkonidae (e.g., Geckos), Pygopodidae, Teiidae (e.g., Race Runners, Tegus), Lacertidae (e.g., Sand Lizards, Ocellated Lizards, Viviparous Lizards, Wall Lizards, Long-Tailed Lizards), Xantuslidae, Scincidae (e.g., Skinks), Cordylidae (e.g., Sungazers), Dibamidae, Xenosauridae, Anguidae (e.g., Slow Worm, Alligator Lizards, Sheltopusik, Glass Lizards), Helodermatidae (e.g., Gila Monster), Lanthanotidae, Varanidae (e.g., Monitors), Leptotyphlopidae, Typhlopidae, Anomalepididae, Aniliidae (e.g., Pipe Snakes), Uropeitidae, Xenopeltidae, Boidae (e.g., Boas, Anacondas, Rock Pythons), Acrochordidae (e.g., Wart Snakes), Colubridae (e.g., Mangrove Snakes, Whip Snakes, Smooth Snakes, Egg-Eating Snakes, Boomslangs, Rat Snakes, Aesculapian Snakes, Four-Lined Snakes, Oriental Beauty Snake, Tentacled Snakes, Hognose Snakes, Kingsnakes, Montpelier Snakes, Grass Snakes, Water Snakes, Garter Snakes, Twig Snakes, Keelback Snakes), Elapidae (e.g., Death Adders, Kraits, Mambas, Coral Snakes, Cobras, Copperhead, Puff Adder), Viperidae (e.g., Vipers, Right Adders, Rattlesnakes, Massasaugas, Adder), Hydrophiidae (e.g., Sea Brait), Amphisbaenidae (e.g., Worm Lizard), Bipedidae, or a Trogonophidae (e.g., Burrowing Lizard).
  • A reptile of the Order Rhynchocephalia may be, for example, a Sphenodontidae (e.g., Tuataras). A reptile of the Order Crocodylia may be, for example, an Alligatoridae (e.g., Alligators, Caiman), Crocodylidae (e.g., Crocodiles), or a Gavialidae (e.g., Gharials).
  • c. Amphibians
  • The biological material of the present invention may be an amphibian or may be derived from an amphibian. The amphibian may be, for example, a frog or a toad. The frog or toad may be, for example, an Arthroleptidae (e.g., screeching frogs), Ascaphidae (e.g., tailed frogs), Brachycephalidae (e.g., gold frogs and shield toads), Bufonidae (e.g., true toads), Centrolenidae (e.g., glass frogs and leaf frogs), Dendrobatidae (e.g., poison-dart frogs), Discoglossidae (e.g., fire-bellied toads), Heleophrynidae (e.g., ghost frogs), Hemisotidae (e.g., shovel-nosed frogs), Hylidae (e.g., New World tree frogs), Hyperoliidae (e.g., African tree frogs), Leiopelmatidae (e.g., New Zealand frogs), Leptodactylidae (e.g., neotropical frogs), Megophryidae (e.g., South Asian frogs), Microhylidae (e.g., microhylid frogs), Myobatrachidae (e.g., Australian frogs), Pelobatidae (e.g., spadefoot toads), Pelodytidae (e.g., parsley frogs), Pipidae (e.g., tongueless frogs), Pseudidae (e.g., paradox frogs), Ranidae (e.g., riparian frogs and true frogs), Rhacophoridae (e.g., Old World tree frogs), Rhinodermatidae (e.g., Darwin's frogs), Rhinophrynidae (e.g., burrowing toad), Sooglossidae (e.g., Seychelle frogs), Caudata (e.g., salamanders), or a Gymnophiona (e.g., caecilians).
  • The amphibian may be a salamander. The salamander may be, for example, an Ambystomatidae (e.g., mole salamanders), Amphiumidae (e.g., amphiumas), Cryptobranchidae (e.g., giant salamanders and hellbenders), Dicamptodontidae (e.g., Pacific giant salamanders), Hynobiidae (e.g., Asiatic salamanders), Plethodontidae (e.g., lungless salamanders), Proteidae (e.g., mudpuppies and waterdogs), Rhyacotritonidae (e.g., torrent salamanders), Salamandridae (e.g., newts and salamanders), or a Sirenidae (e.g., sirens). Alternatively, the amphibian may be a Caecilian. The Caecilian may be, for example, a Caeciliidae (e.g., caecilians), Ichthyophiidae (e.g., Asiatic tailed caecilians), Rhinatrematidae (e.g., neotropical tailed caecilians), Scolecomorphidae (e.g., African caecilians), Typhlonectidae (e.g., aquatic caecilians), or an Uraeotyphlidae (e.g., Indian caecilians).
  • d. Birds
  • The biological material of the present invention may be a bird or may be derived from a bird. The bird may be, for example, an Anseriforme (e.g., waterfowl), Apodiforme (e.g., hummingbirds and swifts), Caprimulgiforme (e.g., nightbirds), Charadriiforme (e.g., shorebirds), Ciconiiforme (e.g., storks), Coliiforme (e.g., mousebirds), Columbiforme (e.g., doves and pigeons), Coraciiforme (e.g., kingfishers), Craciforme (e.g., chacalacas, curassows, guans, megapodes), Cuculiforme (e.g., cuckoos, hoatzin, turacos), Falconiforme (e.g., diurnal birds of prey), Galliforme (e.g., chicken-like birds), Gaviiforme (e.g., loons), Gruiforme (e.g., coots, cranes, rails), Passeriforme (e.g., perching birds), Pelecaniforme (e.g., pelicans), Phoenicopteriforme (e.g., flamingos), Piciforme (e.g., woodpeckers), Podicipediforme (e.g., grebes), Procellariiforme (e.g., tube-nosed seabirds), Psittaciforme (e.g., parrots), Sphenisciforme (e.g., penguins), Strigiforme (e.g., owls), Struthioniforme (e.g., cassowaires, emus, kiwis, ostriches, rheas), Tinamiforme (e.g., tinamous), Trogoniforme (e.g., trogons), or a Turniciforme (e.g., buttonquail).
  • e. Fish
  • The biological material of the present invention may be a fish or may be derived from a fish. The fish may be, for example, an Acipenseriforme (e.g., paddlefishes, spoonfishes, and sturgeons), Polypteriforme (e.g., bichirs, birchers, lobed-finned pike, and reed fishes), Atheriniforme (e.g., rainbow fishes and silversides), Beloniforme (e.g., halfbeeks and needlefishes), Beryciforme, Channiforme, Cyprinodontiforme (e.g., killifishes), Dactylopteriforme (e.g., flying gurnards), Gasterosteiforme (e.g., pipefishes and sticklebacks), Mugiliforme (e.g., mullets), Pegasiforme (e.g., dragonfishes and sea moths), Perciforme (e.g., perch-like fishes), Pleuronectiforme (e.g., flatfishes, flounders, and soles), Scorpaeniforme (e.g., scorpion fishes and sculpins), Stephanoberyciforme, Synbranchiforme (e.g., swamp eels), Tetraodontiforme (e.g., cowfishes, filefishes, leatherjackets, puffers, triggerfishes, and trunkfishes), Zeiforme (e.g., boarfishes, dories, and john dories), Atherinomorpha, Clupeiforme (e.g., anchovies and herrings), Aulopiforme, Albuliforme, Anguilliforme (e.g., eels), Elopiforme (e.g., tarpons), Notacanthiformes (e.g., spiny eels and tapirfishes), Saccopharyngiformes, Lampridiforme (e.g., opahs and ribbonfishes), Characiforme (e.g., leporins and piranhas), Cypriniforme (e.g., minnows, suckers, zebra fish), Gonorhynchiforme (e.g., milkfish and shellears), Gymnotiforme, Siluriforme (e.g., catfishes), Aphredoderiforme (e.g., cavefishes and pirate perches), Batrachoidiforme, Gadiforme (e.g., cods and hakes), Gobiesociforme, Lophiiforme (e.g., anglerfishes), Ophidiiforme, Percopsiforme (e.g., trout-perches), Polymixiiforme (e.g., beardfishes), Cetomimiforme, Ctenothrissiforme, Esociforme (e.g., mudminnows and pikes), Osmeriforme (e.g., Argentines and smelts), Salmoniforme (e.g., salmons), Myctophiforme (e.g., Latern Fishes), Ateleopodiforme, Stomiiforme, Amiiforme (e.g., bowfins), Semionotiforme (e.g., gars), Syngnathiforme (e.g., pipefishes and seahorses), Ceratodontiforme (e.g., Australian lungfishes), Lepidosireniforme (e.g., South American lungfishes and African lungfishes), or a Coelacanthiforme (e.g., coelacanths).
  • f. Invertebrates
  • The biological material maybe an invertebrate or derived from an invertebrate. The invertebrate may be, for example, a Porifera (e.g., sponges), Cnidaria (e.g., jellyfish, hydras, sea anemones, Portuguese man-of-wars, and corals), Platyhelminthe (e.g., flatworms, including planaria, flukes, and tapeworms), Nematoda (e.g., roundworms, including rotifers and nematodes), Mollusca (e.g., mollusks, snails, slugs, octopuses, squids), Annelida (e.g., segmented worms, including earthworms, leeches, and marine worms), Echinodermata (e.g., sea stars, sea cucumbers, sand dollars, sea urchins), Phoronida (e.g., Horseshoe Worms), Tardigrada (e.g., Water Bears), Acanthocephala (e.g., Spiny Headed Worms), Ctenophora (e.g., Comb Jellies), or an Arthropod (e.g., arachnids, crustaceans, millipedes, centipedes, insects).
  • An Arthropod may be, for example, a Coleoptera (e.g., beetles), Diptera (e.g., true flies), Hymenoptera (e.g., ants, bees, wasps), Lepidoptera (e.g., butterflies, moths), Mecoptera (e.g., scorpion flies), Megaloptera, Neuroptera (e.g., lacewings and relatives), Siphonaptera (e.g., fleas), Strepsiptera (e.g., parasitic insects and twisted-winged parasites), Trichoptera (e.g., caddisflies), Anoplura (e.g., sucking lice), Hemiptera (e.g., true bugs and their relatives), Mallophaga (e.g., biting lice), Psocoptera (e.g., psocids), Thysanoptera (e.g., thrips), Orthoptera (e.g., grasshoppers, locusts), Dermaptera (e.g., earwigs), Dictyoptera, Embioptera (e.g., webspinners), Grylloblattodea, Mantophasmatodea (e.g., gladiators), Plecoptera (e.g., stoneflies), Zoraptera (e.g., zorapterans), Ephemeroptera (e.g., mayflies), Odonata (e.g., dragonflies and damselflies), Phasmatoptera (e.g., walkingsticks), Thysanura (e.g., bristletails), Archaeognatha, Collembola (e.g., snow flies and springtails), Chilopoda (e.g., centipedes), Diplopoda (e.g., millipedes), Pauropoda (e.g., pauropods, pauropodans, and progoneates), Symphyla (e.g., pseudocentipedes and symphylans), Malacostraca (e.g., crabs, krill, pill bugs, shrimp), Maxillopoda, Branchiopoda (e.g., branchiopods), Cephalocarida, Ostracoda (e.g., ostracods), Remipedia, Branchiura, Cirripedia (e.g., barnacles), Arachnida (e.g., arachnids, including amblypygids, spiders, daddy longlegs, harvestmen, microscorpions, book scorpions, false scorpions, pseudoscorpions, scorpions, solpugids, sun spiders, and uropygids), Merostomata (e.g., horseshoe crabs), or a Pycnogonida (e.g., sea spiders).
  • g. Fungi
  • The biological material of the present invention may be a fungi or may be derived from a fungi. The fungi may be, for example, an Ascomycota (sac fungi), Basidiomycota (club fungi), Chytridiomycota (chytrids), Deuteromycota, or a Zygomycota. The fungi may be a Rhizopus, Pilobolus, Arthrobotrys, Aspergillus, Allomyces, Chytridium, Agaricus, Amanita, Cortinarius, Neurospora, Moschella, Saccharomyces, Pichia, Candida, Schizosaccharomyces, or Ergot. In particular embodiments the fungi may be Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Schizosaccharomyces pombe, Candida albicans, or Pichia pastoris.
  • h. Plants
  • The biological material of the present invention may be a plant or may be derived from a plant. The plant may be a Bryophyte (e.g., mosses, liverworts, hornworts), Lycophyte (e.g., club mosses, ground pine), Sphenophyte (e.g., horsetails), Pterophyte (e.g., ferns), Cycadophyte (e.g., cycads), Gnetophyte (e.g., gnetum, ephedra, welwitschia), Coniferophyte (e.g., conifers), Ginkophyte (e.g., ginko), or Anthophyte (e.g., flowering plants). The Anthophyte may be a monocot or a dicot. Non-limiting examples of monocotyledonous plants include wheat, maize, rye, rice, turfgrass, sorghum, millet, sugarcane, lily, iris, agave, aloe, orchids, bromeliads, and palms. Non-limiting examples of dicotyledonous plants include tobacco, tomato, potato, soybean, sunflower, alfalfa, canola, rose, Arabidopsis, coffee, citrus fruits, beans, alfalfa, and cotton.
  • i. Protists
  • The biological material of the present invention may be a Protist or may be derived from a Protist. The Protist may be a Rhodophyte (e.g., red algea), Phaeophyte (e.g., brown algea, kelp), Chlorophyte (e.g., green algea), Euglenophyte (e.g., euglenoids) Myxomycot (e.g., slime molds), Oomycot (e.g., water molds, downy mildews, potato blight), or Bacillariophyte (e.g., diatoms).
  • j. Prokaryotes
  • In certain aspects of the invention, the biological material is a prokaryote or is derived from a prokaryote. In certain embodiments the prokaryote is an Archaea (archaebacteria). The archaebacteria may be, for example, a Crenarchaeota, Euryarchaeota, Korarchaeota or Nanoarchaeota. In certain aspects the Euryarchaeota is a Halobacteria, Methanobacteria, Methanococci, Methanomicrobia, Methanosarcinae, Methanopyri, Archeoglobi, Thermoplasmata, or a Thermococci. Specific, non-limiting examples of archaebacteria include: Aeropyrum pernix, Methanococcus jannaschii, Halobacterium marismortui, and Thermoplasma acidophilum.
  • In certain embodiments the prokaryote is an Eubacteria. The Eubacteria may be, for example, an Actinobacteria, Aquificae, Bacteroidetes, Green sulfur bacteria, Chlamydiae, Verrucomicrobia, Chloroflexi, Chrysiogenetes, Cyanobacteria, Deferribacteres, Deinococcus-Thermus, Dictyoglomi, Fibrobacteres/Acidobacteria, Firmicutes, Fusobacteria, Gemmatimonadetes, Nitrospirae, Omnibacteria, Planctomycetes, Proteobacteria, Spirochaetes, Thermodesulfobacteria, or Thermotogae. Non-limiting examples of Actinobacteria include bacteria of the genera Actinomyces, Arthrobacter, Corynebacterium, Frankia, Micrococcus, Micromonospora, Mycobacterium, Propionibacterium, and Streptomyces. Specific examples of Actinobacteria include Mycobacterium leprae, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Corynebacterium glutamicum, Propionibacterium acnes, and Rhodococcus equi.
  • Non-limiting examples of Aquificae include bacteria of the genera Aquifex, Hydrogenivirga, Hydrogenobacter, Hydrogenobaculum, Thermocrinis, Hydrogenothermus, Persephonella, Sulfurihydrogenibium, Balnearium, Desulfurobacterium, and Thermovibrio. Non-limiting examples of Firmicutes include bacteria of the genera Bacilli, Clostridia, and Molecutes. Specific examples of Firmicutes include: Listeria innocua, Listeria monocytogenes, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus thuringiensis, Staphylococcus aureus, Clostridium acetobutylicum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Mycoplasma genitalium, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycoplasma pulmonis, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Streptococcus mutans, Lactococcus lactis, and Enterococcus faecalis.
  • Non-limiting examples of ChlamydiaeNerrucomicrobia include bacteria such as Chlamydia trachomatis, Chlamydia pneumoniae, I Chlamydia psittaci. Non-limiting examples of Deinococcus-Thermus include bacteria of the genera Deinococcus and Thermus.
  • Proteobacteria are gram-negative bacteria. Non-limiting examples of Proteobacteria include bacteria of the genera Escherichia, Salmonella, Vibrio, Rickettsia, Agrobacterium, Brucella, Rhizobium, Neisseria, Bordetella, Burkholderi, Buchnera, Yersinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Shigella, Haemophilus, Pasteurella, Actinobacillus, Legionella, Mannheimia, Coxiella, Aeromonas, Francisella, Moraxella, Pseudomonas, Campylobacter, and Helicobacter. Specific examples of Proteobacteria include: Rickettsia conorii, Rickettsia prowazekii, Rickettsia typhi, Ehrlichia bovis, Agrobacterium tumefaciens, Brucella melitensis, Rhizobium rhizogenes, Neisseria meningitides, Bordetella parapertussis, Bordetella pertussis, Burkholderi mallei, Burkholderi pseudomallei, Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Escherichia coli, Salmonella enterica, Salmonella typhimurium, Yersinia pestis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia enterocolitica, Proteus vulgaris, Shigella flexneri, Shigella sonnei, Shigella dysenterica, Haemophilus influenzae, Pasteurella multocida, Actinobacillus actinomycetemcomitans, Actinobacillus pleuropneumoniae, Haemophilus somnus, Legionella pneumophila, Mannheimia haemolytica, Vibrio cholerae, Vibrio parahaemolyticus, Coxiella burnetii, Aeromonas hydrophile, Aeromonas salmonicida, Francisella tularesis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Pseudomonas putida, Campylobacter jejuni, and Helicobacter pylori.
  • Non-limiting examples of Spirochaetes include bacteria of the families Brachyspiraceae, Leptospiraceae, and Spirochaetaceae. Specific examples of Spirochaetes include Borrelia burgdorferi, and Treponema pallidum.
  • 2. Different Types of Biological Matter
  • Tissues contemplated for use in methods and apparatuses of the invention are limited only insofar as they have cells that utilize oxygen to produce energy (and thus, are alive).
  • Tissue can be from a particular part of the body or organ, such as one from the group consisting of: heart, lung, kidney, liver, bone marrow, pancreas, skin, bone, vein, artery, cornea, blood, small intestine, large intestine, brain, spinal cord, smooth muscle, skeletal muscle, ovary, testis, uterus, and umbilical cord.
  • Moreover, the tissue can contain one or more of the following cell types: platelet, myelocyte, erythrocyte, lymphocyte, adipocyte, fibroblast, epithelial cell, endothelial cell, smooth muscle cell, skeletal muscle cell, endocrine cell, glial cell, neuron, secretory cell, barrier function cell, contractile cell, absorptive cell, mucosal cell, limbus cell (from cornea), stem cell (totipotent, pluripotent or multipotent), unfertilized or fertilized oocyte, or sperm.
  • Moreover, stasis can be induced in plants or parts of plants, including fruit, flowers, leaves, stems, seeds, cuttings. Plants can be agricultural, medicinal, or decorative. Induction of stasis in plants may enhance the shelf life or pathogen resistance of the whole or part of the plant.
  • Methods and apparatuses of the invention can be used to induce stasis in tissue. This can serve to protect and/or preserve them or to prevent damage or injury to them.
  • Tissue can be better preserved for research purposes or for transplantation/implantation purposes. For example, organs can be preserved longer, survive preservation better, and/or endure less injury or damage during the preservation process or as a result of the preservation process.
  • The amount of time that organs for transplant can be preserved varies, with heart and lung being the most time sensitive. Generally, the maximum amounts of time (maximum cold ischemic time) that organs are currently preserved is as follows:
  • Heart and lungs 4-6 hours
    Liver 12-24 hours
    Pancreas 12-24 hours
    Small Intestine 12 hours

    Thus, the present invention can be used to extend these times up to 48 hours by keeping them in stasis for that long.
  • 3. Assays
  • Stasis can be measured by a number of ways, including by quantifying the amount of oxygen consumed by a biological sample, the amount of carbon dioxide produced by the sample (indirect measurement of cellular respiration), or characterizing motility.
  • To determine the rate of consumption of oxygen or the rate of production of carbon dioxide the biological matter is placed into a chamber that is sealed with two openings; for gas import and export. Gas (room air or other gases) is passed into the chamber at a given flow rate and out of the exit port to maintain approximately 1 atmosphere of pressure in the chamber. Before and after exposure to the chamber the gas is passed through a carbon dioxide detector and or an oxygen detector to measure (every second) the amount of each compound in the gas mixture. Comparison of these values over time gives the rate of oxygen consumption or carbon dioxide production.
  • II. Oxygen Antagonists
  • Oxygen metabolism is a fundamental requirement for life in aerobic metazoans. Aerobic respiration accounts for the vast majority of energy production in most animals and also serves to maintain the redox potential necessary to carry out important cellular reactions. In hypoxia, decreased oxygen availability results in inefficient transfer of electrons to molecular oxygen in the final step of the electron transport chain. This inefficiency results in both a decrease in aerobic energy production and an increase in the production of damaging free radicals, mainly due to the premature release of electrons at complex III and the formation of O2 by cytochrome oxidase (Semenza, 1999). Limited energy supplies and free radical damage can interfere with essential cellular processes such as protein synthesis and maintenance of membrane polarities (Hochachka et al., 1996), and will ultimately lead to cell death.
  • A. Carbon Monoxide
  • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas that can be toxic to animals, including humans. According to the Center for Disease Control, more than 450 people unintentionally die from carbon monoxide each year.
  • It can be toxic to organisms whose blood carries oxygen to sustain its survival. It may be poisonous by entering the lungs through normal breathing and displacing oxygen from the bloodstream. Interruption of the normal supply of oxygen jeopardizes the functions of the heart, brain and other vital functions of the body.
  • At amounts of 50 parts per million (ppm), carbon monoxide presents no symptoms to humans exposed to it. However, at 200 ppm, within two-three hours the carbon monoxide can cause a slight headache; at 400 ppm, within one to two hours it can cause a frontal headache that may become widespread within three hours; and, at 800 ppm it can cause dizziness, nausea, and/or convulsions within 45 minutes, and render the subject insensible within two hours. At levels of around 1000 ppm, an organism can expire after exposure for more than around 1-2 minutes.
  • Because of the well-known and well-documented toxic effects of carbon monoxide to an organism, it is thus surprising and unexpected that carbon monoxide can be used to induce stasis of and/or help preserve live biological samples. It is thus contemplated that carbon monoxide can be used for inducing stasis in isolated biological matter, such as blood-free biological matter (because of the effects that carbon monoxide has with respect to hemoglobin, which is a separate pathway than the one involved in inducing stasis).
  • In addition to exposure to carbon monoxide either to induce stasis or to limit or prevent any damage caused by a stasis-inducing agent, the invention contemplates that carbon monoxide may be used in combination with agents or methods that assist in the preservation and/or transplantation/grafting process of biological materials.
  • B. Chalcogenide Compounds
  • Compounds containing a chalcogen element; those in Group 6 of the periodic table, but excluding oxides, are commonly termed “chalcogenides” or “chalcogenide compounds (used interchangeably herein). These elements are sulfur (S), selenium (Se), tellurium (Te) and polonium (Po). Common chalcogenides contain one or more of S, Se and Te, in addition to other elements. Chalcogenide compounds can be employed as reducing agents.
  • The present inventor, though not bound by the following theory, believes that the ability of chalcogenides to induce stasis in cells, and to permit modulation of core body temperature in animals, stems from the binding of these molecules to cytochrome oxidase. In so doing, chalcogenides inhibit or reduce the activity of oxidative phosphorylation. The ability of chalcogenides to block autonomous thermoregulation, i.e., to permit core body temperatures of “warm-blooded” animals to be manipulated through control of environmental temperatures, is believed to stem from the same mechanism as set forth above—binding to cytochrome oxidase, and blocking or reducing the activity of oxidative phosphorylation. Chalcogenides may be provided in liquid as well as gaseous forms.
  • Chalcogenides can be toxic, and at some levels lethal, to mammals. In accordance with the present invention, it is anticipated that the levels of chalcogenide should not exceed lethal levels in the appropriate environment. Lethal levels of chalcogenides may be found, for example in Material Safety Data Sheets for each chalcogenide or from information sheets available from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the US Government.
  • While carbon monoxide and chalcogenide compounds can both induce stasis by acting as an oxygen antagonist, they have different toxic effects that are separate from their abilities to induce stasis. Moreover, the concentrations needed to mediate a stasis effect are different because of the different affinities of cytochrome oxidase. While the affinity of cytochrome oxidase for oxygen is about 1:1 as compared to carbon monoxide, the affinity for H2S appears on the order of about 300:1 as compared to oxygen. This impacts what toxic effects are observed with a stasis-inducing concentration. Thus, it is contemplated that chalcogenide compounds are particularly suited for inducing stasis of biological matter in whole organisms and of whole organisms.
  • It also may prove useful to provide additional stimuli to a biological matter before withdrawing the chalcogenide. In particular, it is envisioned that one may subject an animal to increased ambient temperature prior to removing the source of chalcogenide.
  • 1. H2S
  • Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) is a potentially toxic gas that is often associated with petrochemical and natural gas, sewage, paper pulp, leather tanning, and food processing. The primary effect, at the cellular level, appears to be inhibition of cytochrome oxidase and other oxidative enzymes, resulting in cellular hypoxia. Exposure to extreme levels (500 ppm) results in sudden collapse and unconsciousness, a so-called “knockdown” effect, followed by recovery. Post-exposure effects may persist for years, and include loss of coordination, memory loss, motor dysfunction, personality changes, hallucination and insomnia.
  • Most contact with H2S, however, occurs well below such acute toxicity levels. Nonetheless, there is general concern over longterm contact at sub-acute levels. Some reports exist indicating persistent impairments in balance and memory, as well as altered sensory motor functions may occur in humans following chronic low-level H2S exposure. Kilburn and Warshaw (1995); Kilburn (1999). Others have reported that perinatal exposure of rats to low (20 or 50 ppm) H2S for 7 hours per day from gestation through post-natal day 21 resulted in longer dendritic branches with reduced aborization of cerebellar Purkinje cells. Other neurologic defects associated with relatively low levels of H2S include altered brain neurotransmitter concentrations and altered neurologic responses, such as increased hippocampal theta EEG activity.
  • Behavioral toxicity was studied in rats exposed to moderate levels of H2S. The results showed that H2S inhibits discriminated avoidance responses immediately after the end of the exposure (Higuchi and Fukamachi, 1997), and also interferes with the ability of rats to learn a baited radial arm maze task (Partlo et al., 2001). In another perinatal study using 80 ppm H2S, no neuropathological effects or altered motor activity, passive avoidance, or acoustic startle response in exposed rat pups was seen. Dorman et al. (2000). Finally, Struve et al. (2001) exposed rats to H2S by gas at various levels for 3 hours per day on five consecutive days. Significant reductions in motor activity, water maze performance and body temperature following exposure to 80 ppm or greater H2S were observed. Taken together, these reports indicate that H2S can have a variety of effects on the biochemistry of mammalian tissues, but there is no clear pattern of response in terms of behavior.
  • Typical levels of hydrogen sulfide contemplated for use in accordance with the present invention include values of about 1 to about 150 ppm, about 10 to about 140 ppm, about 20 to about 130 ppm, and about 40 to about 120 ppm, or the equivalent oral, intravenous or transdermal dosage thereof. Other relevant ranges include about 10 to about 80 ppm, about 20 to about 80 ppm, about 10 to about 70 ppm, about 20 to about 70 ppm, about 20 to about 60 ppm, and about 30 to about 60 ppm, or the equivalent oral, intravenous or transdermal thereof. It also is contemplated that, for a given animal in a given time period, the chalcogenide atmosphere should be reduced to avoid a potentially lethal build up of chalcogenide in the subject. For example, an initial environmental concentration of 80 ppm may be reduced after 30 min to 60 ppm, followed by further reductions at 1 hr (40 ppm) and 2 hrs (20 ppm).
  • 2. H2Se, H2Te, and H2Po,
  • Hydrogen selenide (H2Se) is a key metabolite, formed from inorganic sodium selenite (oxidation state +4) via selenodiglutathione (GSSeSG), through reduction by thiols and NADPH-dependent reductases, and released from selenocysteine by lyase action (Ganther, 1999). Hydrogen selenide provides Se for synthesis of selenoproteins after activation to selenophosphate.
  • Hydrogen telluride (H2Te) exists as an unstable gas.
  • 3. Other Reducing Agents
  • In certain embodiments, the reducing agent structure compound is dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylsulfide (DMS), methylmercaptan (CH3SH), mercaptoethanol, thiocyanate, hydrogen cyanide, methanethiol (MeSH), or CS2. In particular embodiments, the oxygen antagonist is CS2, MeSH, or DMS. Compounds on the order of the size of these molecules are particularly contemplated (that is, within about 50% of their molecular weights).
  • Additional compounds that are envisioned as useful for inducing stasis include, but are not limited to, the following structures, many of which are readily available and known to those of skill in the art (identified by CAS number): 104376-79-6 (Ceftriaxone Sodium Salt); 105879-42-3; 1094-08-2 (Ethopropatine HCl); 1098-60-8 (Triflupromazine HCl); 111974-72-2; 113-59-7; 113-98-4 (Penicillin G K+); 115-55-9; 1179-69-7; 118292-40-3; 119478-56-7; 120138-50-3; 121123-17-9; 121249-14-7; 1229-35-2; 1240-15-9; 1257-78-9 (Prochlorperazine Edisylate Salt); 128345-62-0; 130-61-0 (Thioridazine HCl) 132-98-9 (Penicillin V K+); 13412-64-1 (Dicloxacillin Na+ Hydrate); 134678-17-4; 144604-00-2; 146-54-3; 146-54-5 (Fluphenazine 2HCl); 151767-O2-1; 159989-65-8; 16960-16-0 (Adrenocorticotropic Hormone Fragment 1-24); 1982-37-2; 21462-39-5 (Clindamycin HCl); 22189-31-7; 22202-75-1; 23288-49-5 (Probucol); 23325-78-2; 24356-60-3 (Cephapirin); 24729-96-2 (Clindamycin); 25507-04-4; 26605-69-6; 27164-46-1 (Cefazolin Na+); 2746-81-8; 29560-58-8; 2975-34-0; 32672-69-8 (Mesoridazine Benzene Sulfonate); 32887-01-7; 33286-22-5 ((+)-cis-Diltiazem HCl); 33564-30-6 (Cefoxitin Na+); 346-18-9; 3485-14-1; 3511-16-8; 37091-65-9 (Azlocillin Na+); 37661-08-8; 3819-00-9; 38821-53-3 (Cephradine); 41372-O2-5; 42540-40-9 (Cefamandole Nafate); 4330-99-8 (Trimeprazine hemi-(+)-tartrate Salt); 440-17-5 Trifluoperazine 2HCl; 4697-14-7 (Ticarcillin 2Na+); 4800-94-6 (Carbenicillin 2Na+); 50-52-2; 50-53-3; 5002-47-1; 51481-61-9 (Cimetidine); 52239-63-1 (6-propyl-2-thiouracil); 53-60-1 (Promazine HCl); 5321-32-4; 54965-21-8 (Albendazole); 5591-45-7 (Thiothixene); 56238-63-2 (Cefuroxime Na+); 56796-39-5 (Cefmetazole Na+); 5714-00-1; 58-33-3 (Promethazine HCl); 58-38-8; 58-39-9 (Perphenazine); 58-71-9 Cephalothin Na+); 59703-84-3 (Piperacillin Na+); 60-99-1 (Methotrimeprazine Maleate Salt); 60925-61-3; 61270-78-8; 6130-64-9 (Penicillin G Procaine Salt Hydrate); 61318-91-0 Sulconazole Nitrate Salt); 61336-70-7 Amoxicillin Trihydrate); 62893-20-3 Cefoperazone Na+); 64485-93-4 (Cefotaxime Na+); 64544-07-6; 64872-77-1; 64953-12-4 Moxalactam Na+); 66104-23-2 (Pergolide Mesylate Salt); 66309-69-1; 66357-59-3 (Ranitidine HCl); 66592-87-8 (Cefodroxil); 68401-82-1; 69-09-0 (Chlorpromazine HCl); 69-52-3 (Ampicillin Na+); 69-53-4 (Ampicillin); 69-57-8 Penicillin G Na+); 70059-30-2; 70356-03-5; 7081-40-5; 7081-44-9 (Cloxacillin Na+ H2O); 7177-50-6 Nafcillin Na+H2O); 7179-49-9; 7240-38-2 (Oxacillin Na H2O); 7246-14-2; 74356-00-6; 74431-23-5; 74849-93-7; 75738-58-8; 76824-35-6 (Famotidine); 76963-41-2; 79350-37-1; 81129-83-1; 84-02-6 (Prochlorperazine Dimaleate Salt); 87-08-1 (Phenoxymethylpenicillinic Acid); 87239-81-4; 91-33-8 (Benzthiazide); 91832-40-5; 94841-17-5; 99294-94-7; 154-42-7 (6-Thioguanine); 36735-22-5; 536-33-4 (Ethionamide); 52-67-5 (D-Penicillamine); 304-55-2 (Meso-2,3-Dimercaptosuccinic Acid); 59-52-9 2,3-Dimercapto+ propanol 6112-76-1 (6-mercaptopurine); 616-91-1 (N-acetyl-L-cysteine); 62571-86-2 (Captopril); 52-01-7 (spironolactone); and, 80474-14-2 (fluticasone propionate).
  • C. Other Antagonists
  • 1. Hypoxia and Anoxia
  • Hypoxia is a common natural stress and several well conserved responses exist that facilitate cellular adaptation to hypoxic environments. To compensate for the decrease in the capacity for aerobic energy production in hypoxia, the cell must either increase anaerobic energy production or decrease energy demand (Hochachka et al., 1996). Examples of both of these responses are common in metazoans and the particular response used depends, in general, on the amount of oxygen available to the cell.
  • In mild hypoxia, oxidative phosphorylation is still partially active, so some aerobic energy production is possible. The cellular response to this situation, which is mediated in part by the hypoxia-inducible transcription factor, HIF-1, is to supplement the reduced aerobic energy production by upregulating genes involved in anaerobic energy production, such as glycolytic enzymes and glucose transporters (Semenza, 2001; Guillemin et al., 1997). This response also promotes the upregulation of antioxidants such as catylase and superoxide dismutase, which guard against free radical-induced damage. As a result, the cell is able to maintain near normoxic levels of activity in mild hypoxia.
  • In an extreme form of hypoxia, referred to as “anoxia”—defined here as <0.001 kPa O2—oxidative phosphorylation ceases and thus the capacity to generate energy is drastically reduced. In order to survive in this environment, the cell must decrease energy demand by reducing cellular activity (Hochachka et al., 2001). For example, in turtle hepatocytes deprived of oxygen, a directed effort by the cell to limit activities such as protein synthesis, ion channel activity, and anabolic pathways results in a 94% reduction in demand for ATP (Hochachka et al., 1996). In zebrafish (Danio rerio) embryos, exposure to anoxia leads to a complete arrest of the heartbeat, movement, cell cycle progression, and developmental progression (Padilla et al., 2001). Similarly, C. elegans respond to anoxia by entering into suspended animation, in which all observable movement, including cell division and developmental progression, ceases (Padilla et al., 2002; Van Voorhies et al., 2000). C. elegans can remain suspended for 24 hours or more and, upon return to normoxia, will recover with high viability. This response allows C. elegans to survive the hypoxic stress by reducing the rate of energetically expensive processes and preventing the occurrence of damaging, irrevocable events such as aneuploidy (Padilla et al., 2002; Nystul et al., 2003).
  • One recently discovered response is the hypoxia-induced generation of carbon monoxide by heme oxygenase-1 (Dulak et al., 2003). Endogenously produced carbon monoxide can activate signaling cascades that mitigate hypoxic damage through anti-apoptotic (Brouard et al., 2003) and anti-inflammatory (Otterbein et al., 2000) activity, and similar cytoprotective effects can be achieved in transplant models by perfusion with exogenous carbon monoxide (Otterbein et al, 2003; Amersi et al., 2002). At higher concentrations, carbon monoxide competes with oxygen for binding to iron-containing proteins, such as mitochondrial cytochromes and hemoglobin (Gorman et al., 2003), though the cytoprotective effect that this activity may have in hypoxia has not been investigated.
  • Despite the existence of these sophisticated defense mechanisms against hypoxic damage, hypoxia is still often a damaging stress. For example, mammals have both heme oxygenase-1 and HIF-1, and some evidence suggests that suspended animation is possible in mammals as well (Bellamy et al., 1996; Alam et al., 2002). Yet, hypoxic damage due to trauma such as heart attack, stroke or blood loss is a major cause of death. The understanding of the limitations of the two fundamental strategies for surviving hypoxic stress, remaining animated or suspending animation, is hampered by the fact that it has been based on studies in a variety of systems under a variety of conditions.
  • “Hypoxia” occurs when the normal physiologic levels of oxygen are not supplied to a cell or tissue. “Normoxia” refers to normal physiologic levels of oxygen for the particular cell type, cell state or tissue in question. “Anoxia” is the absence of oxygen. “Hypoxic conditions” are those leading to cellular hypoxia. These conditions depend on cell type, and on the specific architecture or position of a cell within a tissue or organ, as well as the metabolic status of the cell. For purposes of the present invention, hypoxic conditions include conditions in which oxygen concentration is at or less than normal atmospheric conditions, that is less that 20.8, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0.5, 0%; alternatively, these numbers could represent the percent of atmosphere at 1 atmosphere of pressure (101.3 kPa). An oxygen concentration of zero percent defines anoxic conditions. Thus, hypoxic conditions include anoxic conditions, although in some embodiments, hypoxic conditions of not less than 0.5% are implemented. As used herein, “normoxic conditions” constitute oxygen concentrations of around 20.8% or higher.
  • Standard methods of achieving hypoxia or anoxia are well established and include using environmental chambers that rely on chemical catalysts to remove oxygen from the chamber. Such chambers are available commercially from, for example, BD Diagnostic Systems (Sparks, Md.) as GASPAK Disposable Hydrogen+Carbon Dioxide Envelopes or BIO-BAG Environmental Chambers. Alternatively, oxygen may be depleted by exchanging the air in a chamber with a non-oxygen gas, such as nitrogen. Oxygen concentration may be determined, for example using a FYRITE Oxygen Analyzer (Bacharach, Pittsburgh Pa.).
  • III. Preservation Applications
  • Stasis can be induced in any cell, tissue, or organism as discussed above. This includes plants or parts of plants, including fruit, flowers, leaves, stems, seeds, cuttings. Plants can be agricultural, medicinal, or decorative. Induction of stasis in plants may enhance the shelf life or pathogen resistance of the whole or part of the plant.
  • In embodiments of the invention, an organism or part thereof can be exposed to an oxygen antagonist for about, at least about, or at most about 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 hours, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 months, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or more years, and any combination or range derivable therein.
  • A. Transplanted Tissue and Organs
  • Though the first successful kidney transplant was performed in 1954 and the first heart and liver transplants were conducted in 1967, every year, thousands of people die in need of an organ transplant. Due to a variety of causes, they need hearts, lungs, kidneys, and livers. In addition, there are patients who could use a pancreas or a cornea. While there is a constant need for organ donors, another significant hurdle in providing those in need of an organ transplant with an organ is the limitations in current organ preservation techniques. For example, it is widely believed that a human heart must be transported within four hours for there to be any chance of the subsequent transplantation to be a success.
  • The two most frequently used methods for preserving/transporting hearts for transplantation are hypothermic storage and continuous perfusion. In the former method, the heart is arrested, removed from the donor, and then rapidly cooled and transported in cold storage. In the latter method, the following steps are typically employed: 1) pulsatile flow; 2) hypothermia; 3) membrane oxygenation, and 4) a perfusate containing both.
  • To improve the prospect of a successful transplant, techniques for better preserving an organ for transplantation have been developed. Two general areas of development have occurred, one in the area of preservation solutions and the other in the area of organ containers.
  • In certain contexts, such as transplant, adverse consequences of wound healing may impair or prevent proper engraftment of transplanted tissue. In the context of the present invention, it is envisioned that donated and recipient tissues will be treated post-transplantation with an oxygen antagonist, as discussed above with respect to wound healing, in an effort to inhibit biological processes such as inflammation, apoptosis and other wound healing/pre-transplantation events that damage engrafted tissues.
  • Because oxygen exchange with the air is very poor with solid tissue, it will be beneficial in some embodiments to provide the oxygen antagonist to the tissue or organ using the vasculature to deliver the oxygen antagonist to the inside of the cell. For example, a saline solution containing carbon monoxide can be administered to a donor subject prior to retrieving the tissue or organ for transplantation.
  • B. Other Preservation Agents
  • A variety of preservation solutions have been disclosed in which the organ is surrounded or perfused with the preservation solution while it is transported. One of the most commonly used solution is ViaSpan® (Belzer UW), which employed with cold storage. Other examples of such solutions or components of such solutions include the St. Thomas solution (Ledingham et al., J. Thorac. Cardiobasc. Surg. 93:240-246, 1987), Broussais solution, UW solution (Ledingham et al., Circulation 82 (Part 2) IV351-8, 1990), Celsior solution (Menasche et al., Eur. J. Cardio. Thorax. Surg. 8:207-213, 1994), Stanford University solution, and solution B20 (Bernard et al., J. Thorac. Cardiovasc. Surg. 90:235-242, 1985), as well as those described and/or claimed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,524,785; 6,492,103; 6,365,338; 6,054,261; 5,719,174; 5,693,462; 5,599,659; 5,552,267; 5,405,742; 5,370,989; 5,066,578; 4,938,961; and, 4,798,824.
  • In addition to solutions, other types of materials are also known for use in transporting organs and tissue. These include gelatinous or other semi-solid material, such as those described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,397.
  • Some of the systems and solutions for organ preservation specifically involve oxygen perfusion in the solution or system to expose the organ to oxygen because it is believed that maintaining the organ or tissue in an oxygenated environment improves viability. See Kuroda et al., (Transplantation 46(3):457-460, 1988) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,490,880; 6,046,046; 5,476,763; 5,285,657; 3,995,444; 3,881,990; and, 3,777,507. Isolated hearts that are deprived of oxygen for more than four hours are believed to lose vigor and not be useful in the recipient because of ischemic/reperfusion injury. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261.
  • Moreover, many, if not all, of the solutions and containers for organ preservation and transplantation involve hypothermia (temperature below room temperature, often near but not below 0° C.), which has been called the “bed rock of all useful methods of organ and tissue preservation.” U.S. Pat. No. 6,492,103.
  • To improve the prospect of a successful transplant, techniques for better preserving an organ for transplantation have been developed. Two general areas of development have occurred, one in the area of preservation solutions and the other in the area of organ containers.
  • Moreover, many, if not all, of the solutions and containers for organ preservation and transplantation involve hypothermia (temperature below room temperature, often near but not below 0° C.), which has been called the “bed rock of all useful methods of organ and tissue preservation.” U.S. Pat. No. 6,492,103.
  • In the field of organ transplantation, certain conditions are believed to be related to the condition of the organ and prognosis for a successful transplantation: 1) minimization of cell swelling and edema; 2) prevention of intracellular acidosis; 3) minimization of ischemic damage; and 4) provision of substrate for regeneration of high energy phosphate compounds and ATP during reperfusion. Ischemic/reperfusion injury in organ transplantation is especially problematic because the harvested organ is removed from the body, isolated from a blood source, and thereby deprived of oxygen and nutrients for an extended period of time (U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,019). In fact, one of the most critical problems in transplantation today is the relatively high incidence of delayed graft function (DGF) due to acute tubular necrosis (ATN) after surgery. Current methods still experience problems in these areas, which highlights the importance of the present invention.
  • Nonetheless, the present invention can be used in conjunction with other preservation compositions and methods. As discussed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,952,168, 5,217,860, 4,559,258 and 6,187,529 (incorporated specifically by reference), biological materials can be preserved, for example, for keeping transplantable or replaceable organs long-term.
  • Cells, tissue/organs, or cadavers can be given compounds that enhance or maintain the condition of organs for transplantation. Such methods and compositions include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,752,929 and 5,395,314.
  • Moreover, methods of the present invention can include exposing biological matter to preservation solutions, such as those discussed, in addition to exposure to an oxygen antagonist.
  • It is contemplated that any agent or solution used with a biological sample that is living and that will be used as a living material will be pharmaceutically acceptable or pharmacologically acceptable. The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable” or “pharmacologically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human. The preparation of an aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art. Typically, such compositions are prepared either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to use can also be prepared.
  • Organs for transplants may be monitored to assess their condition, particularly with respect to use as a transplant. Such methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,699,793.
  • A number of drugs can be administered to a patient after receiving an organ transplant to assist in the recovery process. Such drugs include compounds and agents that reduce or inhibit an immune response against the donated organ.
  • Moreover, additional drugs are continually being researched and offered for use in organ transplants, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,552,083 (inhibitory agent comprising N-(3,4-dimethoxycinnamoyl)anthranililc acid) and 6,013,256 (antibodies that bind the IL-2 receptor, such as a humanized anti-Tax antibody).
  • C. Preservation Apparatuses
  • Systems or containers for transporting organs and tissues have also been developed through the years. Any of these embodiments may be combined with apparatuses of the invention, which allow for use with oxygen antagonists.
  • Most involve cooling systems for implementation, for example, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,292,817, 4,473,637, and 4,745,759, which employ active refrigeration with a cooling liquid that is pumped through the system. Several sophisticated devices have been designed involving multiple chambers or dual containers, such as is U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,434,045 and 4,723,974.
  • Some constitute a system in which an apparatus is devised for perfusion of the organ or tissue in a preservation solution, as is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,490,880; 6,100,082; 6,046,046; 5,326,706; 5,285,657; 5,157,930; 4,951,482; 4,502,295; and, 4,186,565.
  • Some of the systems and solutions for organ preservation specifically involve oxygen perfusion in the solution or system to expose the organ to oxygen because it is believed that maintaining the organ or tissue in an oxygenated environment improves viability. See Kuroda et al., (Transplantation 46(3):457-460, 1988) and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,490,880; 6,046,046; 5,476,763; 5,285,657; 3,995,444; 3,881,990; and, 3,777,507. Isolated hearts that are deprived of oxygen for more than four hours are believed to lose vigor and not be useful in the recipient because of ischemic/reperfusion injury. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261.
  • IV. Screening Applications
  • In still further embodiments, the present invention provides methods for identifying oxygen antagonists and molecules that act in a like fashion with respect to inducing stasis. In some cases, the oxygen antagonist being sought works like a chalcogenide compound in reducing core body temperature or preserving viability in hypoxic or anoxic environments that would otherwise kill the biological matter if it weren't for the presence of the oxygen antagonist. These assays may comprise random screening of large libraries of candidate substances; alternatively, the assays may be used to focus on particular classes of compounds selected with an eye towards attributes that are believed to make them more likely to act as oxygen antagonists. For example, a method generally comprises:
      • (a) providing a candidate modulator;
      • (b) admixing the candidate modulator with a biological matter;
      • (c) measuring one or more cellular responses characteristic of oxygen antagonist treatment; and
      • (d) comparing the one or more responses with the biological matter in the absence of the candidate modulator.
        Assays may be conducted with isolated cells, tissues/organs, or intact organisms.
  • It will, of course, be understood that all the screening methods of the present invention are useful in themselves notwithstanding the fact that effective candidates may not be found. The invention provides methods for screening for such candidates, not solely methods of finding them. However, it will also be understand that a modulator may be identified as an effective modulator according to one or more assays, meaning that the modulator appears to have some ability to act as an oxygen antagonist, such as by inducing stasis in a biological matter. Screening, in some embodiments, involves using an assay described in the Examples to identify a modulator.
  • An effective modulator may be further characterized or assayed. Moreover, the effective modulator may be used in an in vivo animal or animal model (as discussed below) or be used in further in vivo animals or animal models, which may involve the same species of animals or in different animal species.
  • Furthermore, it is contemplated that modulator identified according to embodiments of the invention may also be manufactured after screening. Also, biological matter may be exposed to or contacted with an effective modulator according to methods of the invention, particularly with respect to therapeutic or preservation embodiments.
  • A. Modulators
  • As used herein the term “candidate substance” refers to any molecule that may induce stasis in biological matter by, for example, altering core body temperature. The candidate substance may be a protein or fragment thereof, a small molecule, or even a nucleic acid molecule. One may also acquire, from various commercial sources, small molecule libraries that are believed to meet the basic criteria for useful drugs in an effort to “brute force” the identification of useful compounds. Screening of such libraries, including combinatorally generated libraries (e.g., peptide libraries), is a rapid and efficient way to screen large number of related (and unrelated) compounds for activity. Combinatorial approaches also lend themselves to rapid evolution of potential drugs by the creation of second, third and fourth generation compounds modeled of active, but otherwise undesirable compounds.
  • Candidate compounds may include fragments or parts of naturally-occurring compounds, or may be found as active combinations of known compounds, which are otherwise inactive. It is proposed that compounds isolated from natural sources, such as animals, bacteria, fungi, plant sources, including leaves and bark, and marine samples may be assayed as candidates for the presence of potentially useful pharmaceutical agents. It will be understood that the pharmaceutical agents to be screened could also be derived or synthesized from chemical compositions or man-made compounds. Thus, it is understood that the candidate substance identified by the present invention may be peptide, polypeptide, polynucleotide, small molecule inhibitors or any other compounds that may be designed through rational drug design starting from known inhibitors or stimulators.
  • Other suitable modulators include antisense molecules, siRNAs, ribozymes, and antibodies (including single chain antibodies), each of which would be specific for the target molecule. Such compounds are described in greater detail elsewhere in this document. For example, an antisense molecule that bound to a translational or transcriptional start site, or splice junctions, would be ideal candidate inhibitors.
  • In addition to the modulating compounds initially identified, the inventor also contemplates that other structurally similar compounds may be formulated to mimic the key portions of the structure of the modulators. Such compounds, which may include peptidomimetics of peptide modulators, may be used in the same manner as the initial modulators.
  • B. In vivo Assays
  • In vivo assays involve the use of various animal models. Due to their size, ease of handling, and information on their physiology and genetic make-up, mice are a preferred embodiment. However, other animals are suitable as well, including rats, rabbits, hamsters, guinea pigs, gerbils, woodchucks, mice, cats, dogs, sheep, goats, pigs, cows, horses and monkeys (including chimps, gibbons and baboons). Fish are also contemplated for use with in vivo assays, as are nematodes. Assays for modulators may be conducted using an animal model derived from any of these species.
  • In such assays, one or more candidate substances are administered to an animal, and the ability of the candidate substance(s) to induce stasis, reduce core body temperature, or endow on the biological material the ability to survive hypoxic or anoxic environmental conditions, as compared to an inert vehicle (negative control) and H25 (positive control), identifies a modulator. Treatment of animals with test compounds will involve the administration of the compound, in an appropriate form, to the animal. Administration of the candidate compound (gas or liquid) will be by any route that could be utilized for clinical or non-clinical purposes, including but not limited to oral, nasal (inhalation or aerosol), buccal, or even topical. Alternatively, administration may be by intratracheal instillation, bronchial instillation, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal or intravenous injection. Specifically contemplated routes are systemic intravenous injection, regional administration via blood or lymph supply, or directly to an affected site.
  • VII. Modes of Administration and Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • An effective amount of a chalcogenide pharmaceutical composition, generally, is defined as that amount sufficient to detectably ameliorate, reduce, minimize or limit the extent of the condition of interest. More rigorous definitions may apply, including elimination, eradication or cure of disease.
  • A. Exposure
  • The routes of administration of an oxygen antagonist will vary, naturally, with the cell type, however, generally cells will be exposed to an oxygen antagonist by incubating them with oxygen antagonist (which may be a gas, liquid, or semi-solid liquid), immersing them in the oxygen antagonist (which may be a liquid or semi-solid liquid), injecting them with the oxygen antagonist (which may be a gas, liquid or semi-solid liquid), or perfusing them with the oxygen antagonist (which may be a liquid or semi-solid liquid). When the oxygen antagonist is a gas, it is contemplated that the gas may be blown onto the cells, or the cells may be exposed to the gas in a closed or significantly closed container or chamber.
  • Apparatuses discussed herein can be used to expose cells to an oxygen antagonist. It is contemplated that the oxygen antagonist can be cycled in and out of a chamber or container in which the cells are, or that the amount of the oxygen antagonist to which the cells are exposed can vary periodically or intermittently.
  • B. Formulations
  • Solutions of the active compounds may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant, such as hydroxypropylcellulose. Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms. The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). In all cases the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), suitable mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils. Proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • For administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first rendered isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose. These particular aqueous solutions are especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intratumoral and intraperitoneal administration. In this connection, sterile aqueous media that can be employed will be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. For example, one dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to 1000 ml of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion, (see for example, “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” 15th Edition, pages 1035-1038 and 1570-1580). Some variation in dosage will necessarily occur depending on the condition of the subject being treated. The person responsible for administration will, in any event, determine the appropriate dose for the individual subject. Moreover, for human administration, preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, general safety and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biologics standards.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the active compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various of the other ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • As used herein, “carrier” includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable” or “pharmacologically-acceptable” refers to molecular entities and compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when administered to a human. The preparation of an aqueous composition that contains a protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art. Typically, such compositions are prepared as injectables, either as liquid solutions or suspensions; solid forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection can also be prepared.
  • C. Perfusion Systems
  • A perfusion system for cells may be used to expose a tissue or organ to an oxygen antagonist in the form of a liquid or a semi-solid. Perfusion refers to continuous flow of a solution through or over a population of cells. It implies the retention of the cells within the culture unit as opposed to continuous-flow culture, which washes the cells out with the withdrawn media (e.g., chemostat). Perfusion allows for better control of the culture environment (pH, pO2, nutrient levels, oxygen antagonist levels, etc.) and is a means of significantly increasing the utilization of the surface area within a culture for cell attachment.
  • The technique of perfusion was developed to mimic the cells milieu in vivo where cells are continuously supplied with blood, lymph, or other body fluids. Without perfusion of a physiological nutrient solution, cells in culture go through alternating phases of being fed and starved, thus limiting full expression of their growth and metabolic potential. In the context of the present invention, a perfusion system may also be used to perfuse cells with an oxygen antagonist to induce stasis.
  • Those of skill in the art are familiar with perfusion systems, and there are a number a perfusion systems available commercially. Any of these perfusion systems may be employed in the present invention. One example of a perfusion system is a perfused packed-bed reactor using a bed matrix of a non-woven fabric (CelliGen™, New Brunswick Scientific, Edison, N.J.; Wang et al., 1992; Wang et al., 1993; Wang et al., 1994). Briefly described, this reactor comprises an improved reactor for culturing of both anchorage- and non-anchorage-dependent cells. The reactor is designed as a packed bed with a means to provide internal recirculation. Preferably, a fiber matrix carrier is placed in a basket within the reactor vessel. A top and bottom portion of the basket has holes, allowing the medium to flow through the basket. A specially designed impeller provides recirculation of the medium through the space occupied by the fiber matrix for assuring a uniform supply of nutrient and the removal of wastes. This simultaneously assures that a negligible amount of the total cell mass is suspended in the medium. The combination of the basket and the recirculation also provides a bubble-free flow of oxygenated medium through the fiber matrix. The fiber matrix is a non-woven fabric having a “pore” diameter of from 10 μm to 100 μm, providing for a high internal volume with pore volumes corresponding to 1 to 20 times the volumes of individual cells.
  • The perfused packed-bed reactor offers several advantages. With a fiber matrix carrier, the cells are protected against mechanical stress from agitation and foaming. The free medium flow through the basket provides the cells with optimum regulated levels of oxygen, pH, and nutrients. Products can be continuously removed from the culture and the harvested products are free of cells and can be produced in low-protein medium, which facilitates subsequent purification steps. This technology is explained in detail in WO 94/17178 (Aug. 4, 1994, Freedman et al.), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • The Cellcube™ (Corning-Costar) module provides a large styrenic surface area for the immobilization and growth of substrate attached cells. It is an integrally encapsulated sterile single-use device that has a series of parallel culture plates joined to create thin sealed laminar flow spaces between adjacent plates.
  • The Cellcube™ module has inlet and outlet ports that are diagonally opposite each other and help regulate the flow of media. During the first few days of growth the culture is generally satisfied by the media contained within the system after initial seeding. The amount of time between the initial seeding and the start of the media perfusion is dependent on the density of cells in the seeding inoculum and the cell growth rate. The measurement of nutrient concentration in the circulating media is a good indicator of the status of the culture. When establishing a procedure it may be necessary to monitor the nutrients composition at a variety of different perfusion rates to determine the most economical and productive operating parameters.
  • Other commercially available perfusion systems include, for example, CellPerf® (Laboratories MABIO International, Tourcoing, France) and the Stovall Flow Cell (Stovall Life Science, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.)
  • The timing and parameters of the production phase of cultures depends on the type and use of a particular cell line. Many cultures require a different media for production than is required for the growth phase of the culture. The transition from one phase to the other will likely require multiple washing steps in traditional cultures. However, one of the benefits of a perfusion system is the ability to provide a gentle transition between various operating phases. The perfusion system can also facilitate the transition from a growth phase to a static phase induced by an oxygen antagonist. Likewise, the perfusion system can facilitate the transition from a static phase to a growth phase by replacing the solution comprising an oxygen antagonist with, for example, a physiological nutrient media.
  • D. Delivery of Gases
  • 1. Respiration System
  • In another embodiment of the present invention, gases are delivered to cells, tissues, organs, organ systems or organisms. The general features of systems that provide gases include a reservoir for the source gas operably connected to a chamber of sufficient size/shape to permit enclosure of the appropriate subject matter. The system will also comprise means for controlling introduction of the gas, and optionally its evacuation from the chamber. Such means may comprise one or more valves, pumps, fans or vents, or combinations thereof. In addition, such features may be automated and controlled by computers and computer programs.
  • An exemplary gas delivery system 100 is illustrated in FIG. 9. The delivery system 100 is suited for delivering breathable gases, including an active agent, to the respiration system of a subject. It can be modified for use with tissue instead of an organism. The gas delivery system 100 includes one or more gas sources 102. Each of the gas sources 102 is connected to a regulator 104 and a flowmeter 106. The gas delivery system 100 also includes an active agent source 107, an optional vaporizer 108, an outlet controller 110, a scavenger 112, and an alarm/monitoring system 114.
  • The delivery system 100 may include certain elements generally used in an anesthesia delivery machine. For example, anesthesia delivery machines generally include a high pressure circuit, a low pressure circuit, a breathing circuit, and a scavenging circuit. As described in FIGS. 10-11, one or more of the gas sources 102, the vaporizer 108, the outlet controller 110, the scavenger 112, and/or the alarm/monitoring system 114 may be provided as part of a device having a high pressure, low pressure, breathing, and/or scavenging circuit, and these elements may be similar to those generally used in an anesthesia delivery machine. Anesthesia delivery machines are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,034,753; 4,266,573; 4,442,856; and 5,568,910, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • The gas sources 102 may be provided by tanks of compressed gas; however, it should be understood that the gas sources 102 can be either a gas or a liquid source that is converted to a gas. For example, the vaporizer 108 can be used to vaporize a liquid gas source. The regulators 104 include valves that reduce the pressure of each of the gas sources 102. The decompressed gas then passes through one of the flowmeters 106, which measures and controls the flow of gas from each of the respective gas sources 102.
  • The gas sources 102 may be carrier gases that are used to deliver the active agent 107. The carrier gases may be selected to provide a desired environment for a subject to which the active agent from the source 107 is delivered. For example, if the active agent is delivered to a patient as a breathable gas, the carrier gases can include oxygen, nitrous oxide, or air in sufficient quantities to satisfy the needs of the patient. Other inert or active gases may be used.
  • In some embodiments, one of the gas sources 102 includes the active agent source 107. The active agent from the source 107 may be a liquid gas source that is vaporized by the vaporizer 108 or the active agent may be a gaseous source, such as a compressed gas under high pressure. The active agent can be mixed with one or more of the gas sources 102. The outlet controller 110 controls the amount of the gas mixture that is provided to the subject.
  • The scavenger 112 is a device or system that scavenges and/or ventilates the gases that are provided to the subject. For example, if the active agent from the source 107 is provided as a breathable gas to a patient, the scavenger 112 can be used to remove the waste gases of the inhalant (such as the active agent), unused oxygen, and exhaled carbon dioxide.
  • The alarm/monitoring system 114 includes sensors that monitor the gas flow and/or gas content at one or more locations within the delivery system 100. For example, the flow or amount of oxygen may be monitored when the active agent from the source 107 is provided as a breathable gas to a patient to ensure that the carrier gases include sufficient oxygen for the patient. The alarm/monitoring system 114 also includes a user interface that is configured to provide an audio or visual alarm or monitoring information to a user of the delivery system 100, such as a visual display, a light, or audio alarm. The alarm/monitoring system 114 can be configured to notify the user when a predetermined condition is met and/or to provide information regarding gas levels.
  • With reference to FIG. 10, a system 100A includes a high pressure circuit 116, a low pressure circuit 118, a breathing circuit 120, and a scavenging circuit 122.
  • The high pressure circuit 116 includes the compressed gas sources 102, which are connected to regulator valves 104 b, 104 a. The regulator valves 104 a control the amount of gas that flows from each of the gas sources 102, and the regulator valves 104 b may be opened to increase the pressure of the gas, for example, by providing an opening to the surrounding atmosphere.
  • The low pressure circuit 118 includes the flowmeters 106, the active agent source 107, and the vaporizer 108. A gas mixture from the gas sources 102 is provided by the flowmeters 106, which control the amount of each of the gases from the gas sources 102. As illustrated in FIG. 10, the active agent source 107 is a liquid. The active agent source 107 is vaporized by the vaporizer 108 and added to the gas mixture.
  • The breathing circuit 120 includes the outlet controller 110, two one- way valves 124, 126 and an absorber 128. The scavenger circuit 122 includes a valve 112 a, a reservoir 112 b, and an outlet 112 c. A subject 130 receives the gas mixture from the outlet controller 110 and the resulting gas is ventilated by the scavenger circuit 122. More specifically, the outlet controller 110 controls the amount of the gas mixture that is delivered to the subject 130 via the one-way valve 124. Expired gases flow through the one-way valve 126 to the valve 112 a and to the reservoir 112 b. Excess gases exit through the outlet 112 c of the scavenger 112. Some of the gases may be recycled and flow through the absorber 128 and into the breathing circuit 120. The absorber 128 may be a carbon dioxide absorbing canister for reducing carbon dioxide gases from exhaled gases. In this configuration, expired oxygen and/or active agent may be re-circulated and reused.
  • One or more sensors S may be added at various positions in the system 100A. The sensors S sense and/or monitor the gases in the system 100A. For example, if one of the gas sources 102 is oxygen, one of the sensors S may be an oxygen sensor configured and positioned to monitor the oxygen in the system 100A so that the patient receives a suitable amount of oxygen. The sensors S are in communication with the alarm/monitoring system 114 (see FIG. 9). If undesirable or dangerous gas levels are present in the system 100, the alarm/monitoring system 114 may alert a user of the system 100A so that appropriate action may be taken, such as increasing the oxygen levels given to the subject 130 or disconnecting the subject 130 from the delivery system 100A.
  • With reference to FIG. 11, a system 100B is shown in which the active agent source 107 is connected to two of the regulator valves 104 b, 104 a. If the active agent source 107 is a liquid gas source, an optional vaporizer 108 is provided to vaporize the liquid gas source. If the active agent source 107 is gaseous (e.g., a high pressure gas), then the vaporizer 108 may be omitted. The active agent from the source 107 is mixed with the other gas sources 102 in the low pressure circuit 118 in amounts that are controlled by the flowmeters 106. The low pressure circuit 118 includes a gas reservoir 109 that contains any overflow of the gas mixture as it flows to the breathing circuit 120. It should be understood that the active agent source 107 and/or any of the gas sources 102 may be provided as a liquid gas source with a vaporizer. The elements of the system 100B illustrated in FIG. 11 are essentially the same as those described above with respect to FIG. 10 and will not be described further.
  • Methods according to embodiments of the present invention which may be carried out using the systems 100, 100A, 100B are illustrated in FIG. 12. A mixture of one or more breathable gas sources is provided (Block 202). The breathable gas sources may be obtained from the gas sources 102 as described with respect to FIGS. 9-11. A predetermined amount of the active agent is added to the gas mixture (Block 204), such as is shown with respect to the active agent source 107 in FIGS. 9-11. The gas mixture is administered to the subject 120 (Block 306). Exhaled gases are ventilated and/or recycled (Block 208), for example, by the scavenger 112. Although the methods of FIG. 12 are described with respect to the systems 100, 100A, 100B of FIG. 9-11, it should be understood that any suitable system or device may be used to carry out the steps in FIG. 12.
  • 2. Reduced Pressure Delivery System
  • Embodiments of a gas delivery system 300 are illustrated with respect to FIG. 13. The gas delivery system 300 is positioned on a subject 302. The gas delivery system 300 is particularly suited to deliver an active agent in a gas mixture to the tissue of a subject 302, for example, wound tissue.
  • The system 300 includes a reduced pressure chamber 304 having a screen 306 that covers the treatment area of the subject 302. The reduced pressure chamber 304 is connected to a vacuum pump 310 by a pump outlet 310 a. The reduced pressure chamber 304 includes an inlet 308 a and an outlet 308 b, which are in turn connected to an active agent source 307. A controller 320 is connected to the active agent source 307 and the vacuum pump 310. Reduced pressure chambers and vacuum pump systems are discussed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,645,081 and 5,636,643, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • The reduced pressure chamber 304 is configured to enclose an area of the subject 302 to provide a fluid-tight or gas-tight enclosure to effect treatment of the area with reduced or negative pressure and the active agent source 307. The pressure chamber 304 can be affixed to the subject 302 with a cover (not shown), such as a flexible, adhesive, fluid impermeable polymer sheet. The cover can have an adhesive backing that functions to cover the skin around the periphery of the area being treated and to provide a generally gas-tight or fluid-tight seal and to hold the chamber 304 in position.
  • The screen 306 is positioned over the treatment area of the subject 302. For example, if the treatment area of the subject 302 includes a wound, the screen 306 can be positioned over the wound to prevent its overgrowth. The size and configuration of the screen 306 can be adjusted to fit the individual treatment area, and may be formed from a variety of porous materials. The material should be sufficiently porous to allow oxygen any other gases, such as gases from the active agent source 307, to reach the treatment area. For example, the screen 306 can be in the form of an open-cell polymer foam, such as a polyurethane foam, which is sufficiently porous to allow gas flow to and/or from the treatment area. Foams may be used that vary in thickness and rigidity, although it may be desirable to use a spongy material for the patient's comfort if the patient must lie upon the appliance during treatment. The foam may also be perforated to enhance gas flow and to reduce the weight of the system 300. The screen 306 may be cut to an appropriate shape and size to fit within the treatment area, or alternatively, the screen 306 may be sufficiently large to overlap the surrounding skin.
  • The vacuum pump 310 provides a source of suction within the reduced pressure chamber 304. The active agent source 307 provides an amount of the active agent to the reduced pressure chamber 304. The controller 320 controls the amount of vacuum applied to the reduced pressure chamber 304 by the vacuum pump 310 and the amount of the active agent that is supplied to the chamber 304 by the active agent source 307.
  • It should be understood that the controller 320 can apply a vacuum and/or the active agent in a substantially constant manner, cyclically, or using various fluctuations or patterns or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the active agent is supplied by the active agent source 307 alternatively with the vacuum pumping action of the vacuum pump 310. That is, the controller 320 alternatively activates the vacuum pump 310 while deactivating the active agent source 307 and then activates the active agent source 307 while deactivating the vacuum pump 310. The pressure in the reduced pressure chamber 304 is allowed to fluctuate. In other embodiments, a substantially constant pressure is maintained by the vacuum pump 310 and the active agent source 307 provides a substantially constant amount of active agent to the chamber 304 in the reduced pressure environment. In some embodiments, a substantially constant pressure is maintained by the vacuum pump 310 and the amount of the active agent varies in a cyclical manner. In other embodiments, the pressure in the reduced pressure chamber 304 is made to fluctuate by the vacuum pump 310, and the amount of active agent supplied by the source 307 also fluctuates. The fluctuations of either the vacuum pump 310 and the resulting pressure in the chamber 304 or the amount of active agent supplied by the source 307 may be cyclical or not cyclical.
  • Methods according to embodiments of the present invention which may be carried out using the system 300 are illustrated in FIG. 14. The chamber 304 is positioned over the treatment area of the subject 302 (Block 402). Pressure is reduced in the chamber 304 by the vacuum pump 310 (Block 404). A predetermined amount of active agent from the active agent source 307 is applied to the chamber (Block 406). Although the methods of FIG. 6 are described with respect to the system 300 of FIG. 5, it should be understood that any suitable system or device may be used to carry out the steps in FIG. 14. For example, the outlet 308 b may be omitted and the active agent may be supplied to the chamber 304 by the single inlet 308 a. Other gases may also be added to the chamber 304, for example, using a single inlet or an inlet and an outlet, such as is illustrated with respect to the active agent source 307 and the inlet 308 a and the outlet 308 b. In some embodiments, the vacuum pump 310 is attached to an additional collection container between the pump 310 and the chamber 304 for collecting exudates from the treatment area, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,636,643.
  • Negative pressure gas delivery systems 300 as illustrated in FIG. 13 are useful for treating a variety of areas for treatment, and, in particular, for treating wounds. Wounds that may be treated using the system 300 include infected open wounds, decubitus ulcers, dehisced incisions, partial thickness burns, and various lesions to which flaps or grafts have been attached. Treatment of a wound can be carried out by securing a gas delivery system to the treatment site as previously shown and described, maintaining a substantially continuous or cyclical reduced pressure within the reduced pressure chamber 304 and supplying the active agent to the chamber 304 in a substantially continuous or cyclical fashion until the wound has reached a desired improved condition. A selected state of improved condition may include formation of granulation tissue sufficient for the attachment of a flap or graft, reduction of microbial infection in the wound, arrest or reversal of burn penetration, closure of the wound, integration of a flap or graft with the underlying wounded tissue, complete healing of the wound, or other stages of improvement or healing appropriate to a given type of wound or wound complex. The gas delivery system may be changed periodically, such as at 48 hrs intervals, during treatment, particularly when using a gas delivery system incorporating a screen on or in the wound. The method may be practiced using a negative or reduced pressure ranging from 0.01 to 0.99 atmospheres, or the method may be practiced using a negative or reduced pressure ranging between 0.5 to 0.8 atmospheres. The time period for use of the method on a wound may be at least 12 hrs, but can be, for example, extended for one or more days. There is no upper limit beyond which use of the method is no longer beneficial; the method can increase the rate of closure up to the time the wound actually closes. Satisfactory treatment of various types of wounds may be obtained via the use of reduced pressures equivalent to about 2 to 7 in. Hg below atmospheric pressure.
  • Supplying reduced pressure to the gas delivery system in an intermittent or cyclic manner, such as described above, may be useful for treating wounds in the presence of the active agent. Intermittent or cyclic supply of reduced pressure to a gas delivery system may be achieved by manual or automatic control of the vacuum system. A cycle ratio, the ratio of “on” time to “off” time, in such an intermittent reduced pressure treatment may be as low as 1:10 or as high as 10:1. A typical ratio is approximately 1:1 which is usually accomplished in alternating 5 minute intervals of reduced pressure supply and non-supply.
  • A suitable vacuum system includes any suction pump capable of providing at least 0.1 pounds of suction to the wound, or up to three pounds suction, or up to fourteen (14) pounds suction. The pump can be any ordinary suction pump suitable for medical purposes that is capable of providing the necessary suction. The dimension of the tubing interconnecting the pump and the reduced pressure appliance is controlled by the pump's ability to provide the suction level needed for operation. A ¼ inch diameter tube may be suitable.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods of treating damaged tissue which include the steps of applying negative pressure to a wound and the active agent for a selected time and at a selected magnitude sufficient to reduce bacterial density in the wound. Open wounds are almost always contaminated with harmful bacteria. Generally a bacterial density of 105 bacterial organisms per gram of tissue is regarded as infected. It is generally accepted that at this level of infection, grafted tissue will not adhere to a wound. These bacteria must be killed, either through the wound host's natural immune response or through some external method, before a wound will close. The application of negative pressure and active agent to a wound may reduce the bacterial density of the wound. It is believed that this effect may be due to the bacteria's incompatibility with a negative pressure environment or the increased blood flow to the wound area in combination with exposure to the active agent, as blood brings with it cells and enzymes to destroy the bacteria. Methods according to embodiments of the present invention can be used to reduce bacterial density in a wound by at least half. In some embodiments, it can be used to reduce bacterial density by at least 1,000-fold or by at least 1,000,000-fold.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods of treating a burn which include the steps of applying negative pressure and the active agent to the burn over an area with predetermined reduced pressure and for a time sufficient to inhibit formation of a full thickness burn. A partial thickness burn, one which has a surface layer of dead tissue and an underlying zone of stasis, is often sufficiently infected so that it will transform within 24-48 hrs into a full thickness burn, one in which all epidermal structures are destroyed. The application of negative pressure and an amount of the active agent to the wound may prevent the infection from becoming sufficiently severe to cause destruction of the underlying epidermal structures. The magnitude, pattern, and duration of pressure application can vary with the individual wound.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also include methods for enhancing the attachment of living tissue to a wound which comprises the steps of first joining the living tissue to the wound to form a wound-tissue complex, then applying a negative or reduced pressure of selected magnitude and an amount of the active agent to the wound-tissue complex over an area sufficient to promote migration of epithelia and subcutaneous tissue toward the complex, with the negative pressure and exposure to the active agent being maintained for a selected time period sufficient to facilitate closure of the wound. Attachment of living tissue to a wound is a common procedure that can take many forms. For example, one common technique is the use of a “flap,” a technique in which skin tissue from an area adjacent to the wound is detached on three sides but remains attached on the fourth, then is moved onto the wound. Another frequently used technique is an open skin graft in which skin is fully detached from another skin surface and grafted onto the wound. The application of negative pressure and active agent to the wound-graft complex reduces bacterial density in the complex and improves blood flow to the wound, thereby improving the attachment of the grafted tissue.
  • VIII. Combination Therapies
  • The compounds and methods of the present invention may be used in the context of a number of therapeutic applications, particularly organ transplants or skin grafts. In order to increase the effectiveness of a treatment with the compositions of the present invention, such as oxygen antagonists, it may be desirable to combine these compositions with other agents effective in the treatment of the underlying diseases and conditions or to promote acceptance of the transplant (secondary therapy). For example, immunosuppressants may be administered in conjunction with transplanting the organ or tissue.
  • Various combinations may be employed; for example, an oxygen antagonist, such as H2S, is “A” and the secondary therapy is “B”:
  • A/B/A B/A/B B/B/A A/A/B A/B/B B/A/A A/B/B/B B/A/B/B
    B/B/B/A  B/B/A/B  A/A/B/B  A/B/A/B  A/B/B/A
    B/B/A/A  B/A/B/A  B/A/A/B  A/A/A/B  B/A/A/A
    A/B/A/A  A/A/B/A
  • Administration of the oxygen antagonists of the present invention to biological matter will follow general protocols for the administration of that particular secondary therapy, taking into account the toxicity, if any, of the oxygen antagonist treatment. It is expected that the treatment cycles would be repeated as necessary. It also is contemplated that various standard therapies, as well as surgical intervention, may be applied in combination with the described therapies.
  • IX. Examples
  • The following examples are included to demonstrate preferred embodiments of the invention. It should be appreciated by those of skill in the art that the techniques disclosed in the examples which follow represent techniques discovered by the inventor to function well in the practice of the invention, and thus can be considered to constitute preferred modes for its practice. However, those of skill in the art should, in light of the present disclosure, appreciate that many changes can be made in the specific embodiments which are disclosed and still obtain a like or similar result without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • Example 1 Preservation of Nematodes in Carbon Monoxide
  • The atmosphere contains 210,000 ppm oxygen. Exposure to low levels of oxygen, or hypoxia, results in cellular damage and death in humans. In the nematode, C. elegans, oxygen concentrations between 100 ppm and 1000 ppm are also lethal. By critically studying the response of nematodes to a range of oxygen tensions, it was found that oxygen concentrations below 10 ppm and above 5000 ppm are not lethal. In 10 ppm oxygen balanced with nitrogen, nematodes enter into a state of reversible suspended animation in which all aspects of animation observable under the light microscope ceases (Padilla et al., 2002). In oxygen concentrations of 5000 ppm (balanced with nitrogen) and above, nematodes progress through their life cycle normally. In a search for drugs that protect nematodes against hypoxic damage, carbon monoxide was tested.
  • To achieve specific atmospheric conditions the following apparatus was used: a glass syringe barrel having a tip with a locking device such as a LUER-LOK with the large opening of the barrel sealed with a custom-machined steel and rubber fitting to make an airtight seal was locked to via locking device to the inlet port of an environmental chamber having an inlet and an outlet port each fitted with a locking devices such as a LUER-LOK fitting. A defined gas was humidified and provided to the environmental chamber by first venting the gas from a compressed tank (Byrne Specialty Gas, Seattle, Wash.) through a gas washing bottle (500 ml Kimex) filled with double distilled water. The gas washing bottle was connected to the environmental chamber past a gas-flow meter. A gas flow meter was used to provide a regulated 70 cc/min flow through the environmental chamber throughout the 24 hr incubation.
  • To test whether induced, reversible stasis could be achieved in C. elegans nematodes, 2-cell C. elegans embryos, L3 larvae or adult nematodes were collected and exposed to either an environment of effectively 100% CO, an environment of 100% N2, an environment comprising 500 ppm oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide, or to environments comprising 100, 500 or 1000 ppm oxygen balanced with nitrogen at room temperature. Nematodes were visualized using differential interference contrast microscopy (also known as Nomarski optics). Images were collected and analyzed using NIH image and Adobe Photoshop 5.5. Embryos are approximately 50 μm in length.
  • Results of these experiments showed that 100% carbon monoxide was not lethal and induced reversible suspended animation. Nematodes did not survive 500 ppm oxygen balances with nitrogen, however, those treated with 500 ppm oxygen balanced with carbon monoxide entered into suspended animation and survived. See below:
  • Example 2 Preservation of Human Skin in Carbon Monoxide
  • Carbon monoxide is extraordinarily toxic to humans because it strongly competes with oxygen for binding to hemoglobin, the primary molecule that distributes oxygen to tissues. The fact that nematodes, which do not have hemoglobin, are resistant to carbon monoxide and even protected against hypoxic damage by this drug suggested the possibility that carbon monoxide would protect against hypoxic damage in human tissue in situations where blood is not present, such as in tissue transplant or blood free surgical fields. To tested this hypothesis using human skin.
  • Three human foreskins were obtained for this purpose. The foreskin tissue was preserved in keratinocyte growth medium (KGM) containing insulin, EGF (0.1 ng/ml), hydrocortisone (0.5 mg/ml) and bovine pituitary extract (approx. 50 micrograms/ml of protein). Foreskins were rinsed in PBS, and excess fatty tissue was removed. Each foreskin sample was divided into 2 equal pieces. Each piece was placed into a separate container containing a solution of PBS with 24 mg/ml of Dispase II (from Bacillus Polymyxa EC 3.4.24.4:Roche Diagnostics Corp., Indianapolis, Ind.). One container (containing a foreskin piece in PBS with Dispase II) was kept in a humid chamber in a fume hood. The other container (with the other half of the foreskin in PBS with Dispase II) was placed in the same fume hood in an environmental chamber perfused with humidified 100% CO. Both samples were maintained at room temperature for 24 hrs. Methods used to establish defined atmospheric conditions were identical to those used in Example 1.
  • Following the 24 hr exposure to normoxia or 100% CO, keratinocytes were isolated from the foreskins according to the method described by Boyce et al. (1983; 1985; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Briefly, the epidermis from each foreskin sample was removed to a fresh dish containing PBS. The epidermis was minced and homogenized prior to incubation in 3 ml of 0.05% Trypsin, 1 mM EDTA for 5 minutes, at room temperature, to separate basal cells from the epidermis. After incubation, 6 ml of 400 μg/ml (micrograms per ml) Soybean Trypsin Inhibitor, 1 mg/ml BSA was added and the samples were centrifuged at 900 RPM. The supernatant from each sample was discarded and the sample pellets were resuspended in 10 ml of KGM. Each sample was split into two 10 cm plates each of which contained 5 ml KGM and 100 μl of HEPES pH 7.3 (N-2-hydroxyethylpiperazine-N′-2-ethane sulfonic acid). The plates were incubated in a 37° C. incubator perfused with 95% room air, 5% carbon dioxide for five days.
  • Cells were inspected visually using an inverted phase contrast microscope. All three of the keratinocyte populations exposed to normoxia showed little or no growth. All three of the keratinocyte populations exposed to 100% CO showed significant growth. Quantitation of the number of viable keratinocytes as judged by colony formation was quantified for two of the three foreskins. See FIG. 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Quantitation of Colony Formation
    Foreskin Atmosphere Total colonies
    1 100% 542 colonies (many of which were very
    CO large)
    1 Normoxia 2 colonies (both small)
    2 100% CO 780 colonies (many of which were very
    large)
    2 Normoxia 0 colonies
  • Example 3 More Information Related to Example 1
  • The following example contains information that overlaps and extends the information disclosed in Example 1.
  • A. Materials and Methods
  • Environmental chambers and apparatuses. Oxygen deprivation experiments were carried out using a custom atmospheric chamber designed by W. Van Voorhies (Van Voorhies et al., 2000). The chamber is a 30 mL glass syringe (Fisher #14-825-10B) fitted with a custom steel stopper that is lined with two viton o-rings to ensure a tight seal. The stopper is bored through and has a steel lure lock on the exterior face so that a hose carrying compressed gas can be attached. A defined gas mixture is delivered to the chamber at a constant pressure and flow rate from compressed tanks by passing first through a rotometer (Aalborg, flow-tube number 032-41ST) or mass flow controller (Sierra Instruments #810) to monitor flow rate and then through a 500 ml gas washing bottle (Fisher #K28220-5001) containing 250 ml water to hydrate the gas. ¼″ OD nylon (Cole-Parmer #P-06489-06) or FEP (Cole-Parmer #A-06450-05) tubing was used and connections between tubing and the regulators and between the tubing and the rotometers were made with brass John-Guest-type fittings (Byrne Gas). All other connections were made with either microflow quick-connect fittings (Cole-Parmer #A-06363-57, #A-06363-52) or standard lure fittings (Cole-Parmer #A-06359-37, #A-06359-17).
  • Viability of nematodes in hypoxia. Bristol strain N2 were continuously maintained at 20° C. with care taken to ensure the population did not starve. Log-phase, adult C. elegans were picked into a drop of sterile water containing 100 μg/ml ampicillin, 15 μg/ml tetracycline and 200 μg/ml streptomycin on a glass plate. Adults were chopped with a razor blade and 2-cell embryos were picked using a mouth pipet. 30-60 2-cell embryos were transferred to a small glass boat (custom made to fit atmospheric chambers, Avalon Glass Works, Seattle Wash.) filled with 3 ml of 1% agarose in M9. Boats were then placed into a humid chamber for 2 hours to allow the embryos to age and then placed into the environmental chamber. The environmental chambers were continuously perfused at room temperature with either pure N2 (grade 4.5), 100 ppm O2/N2, 500 ppm O2/N2, 1000 ppm O2/N2, or 5000 ppm O2/N2 at 70 cc/min for 24 hrs. Following exposure, agarose chunks containing the embryos were cut out of the boat and placed with embryos facing up onto a medium-sized NGM plate seeded with E. coli (OP50). Embryos were scored for hatching 24 hours after exposure and hatched L1's were transferred to the surface of the NGM plate and followed to adulthood. Animals that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total. All gases were supplied by Byrne Gas (Seattle, Wash.). The pure N2 was guaranteed to contain less than 10 ppm impurities and all O2/N2 mixtures were certified to ±2% of the oxygen content (e.g., 100 ppm O2/N2 was certified to contain between 98 ppm O2 and 102 ppm O2). Parts per million to kPa conversion was based on 1 million parts=101 kPa at 1 atmosphere.
  • Viability of nematodes in carbon monoxide based atmospheres. 30-60 embryos were harvested from continuously maintained Bristol N2 and hif-2(ia04) strains as described above. Environmental chambers were continuously perfused at room temperature with pure CO (grade CP) or 500 ppm O2/CO at 70 cc/min for 24 hrs. To achieve 2500 ppm O2/CO or 2500 ppm O2/N2, 5000 ppm O2/N2 was mixed at a 1:1 ratio with either pure CO or pure N2 using two mass flow controllers (Sierra Instruments 810) to precisely monitor flow. Each gas was delivered into a 3-way valve (Cole-Parmer #A-30600-23) at 50 cc/min and the resulting mixture was then passed through a gas washing bottle and into an environmental chamber throughout the 24 hour exposure. All gases were supplied by Byrne Gas (Seattle, Wash.). The 500 ppm O2/CO mixture was certified to ±2% of the oxygen content and contained 7000 ppm N2 to ensure a consistent O2/CO ratio throughout the use of the tank.
  • Cell biological analysis. To determine the extent of developmental progression in nitrogen-based atmospheres (Table 2), 2-cell embryos were exposed to various degrees of hypoxia as described above and were either immediately photographed, or photographed following a 12 hr recovery period in a humid chamber. To determine whether embryos arrested in carbon monoxide-based atmospheres, 2-cell embryos were aged in room air for two hours and were either photographed immediately or put into 100% carbon monoxide or 0.05 kPa O2/CO for 24 hours and photographed immediately following the exposure. In all cases, DIC microscopy was done by placing embryos under a cover slip on a thin 1% agarose pad and viewing on a Zeiss axioscope. Photographs were taken using RS Image and Adobe Photoshop software.
  • B. Results
  • HIF-1 has been previously reported to be required in C. elegans in mild hypoxia (0.5 kPa O2 (Padilla et al., 2002) and 1 kPa O2 (Jiang et al., 2001)) and suspended animation is known to be possible in anoxia (>0.001 kPa O2) (Padilla et al., 2002). To precisely define the ranges in which each of these responses are active, the viability of wild-type C. elegans embryos was determined following exposure to various oxygen tensions between mild hypoxia and anoxia for 24 hrs. Embryos exposed to anoxia entered suspended animation as previously reported, and thus survived the exposure with high viability. Embryos in 0.5 kPa O2 remained animated throughout the exposure and also survived with high viability. However, embryos exposed to an intermediate range of oxygen tensions between mild hypoxia and anoxia (0.1 kPa O2 to 0.01 kPa O2) surprisingly did not survive (FIG. 2).
  • Embryos did not hatch during exposure to this intermediate range of hypoxia, indicating that they did not successfully execute the HIF-1 mediated response. To determine if they appeared suspended, it was examined whether embryos in this intermediate range arrested embryogenesis during the exposure. Embryos in lethal oxygen tensions did not arrest embryogenesis, and increased amounts of oxygen correlated with an increase in the extent of developmental progression in the embryo (Table 2). Upon reoxygenation, the majority of these embryos failed to hatch and many of those that did hatch arrested as abnormal L1s. These data show that this intermediate range of hypoxia is a unique stress in which oxygen levels are neither sufficiently high to facilitate continued animation nor sufficiently low to induce suspended animation.
  • Based on these findings, it was hypothesized that if carbon monoxide, a competitive inhibitor of oxygen binding, could induce suspended animation in the presence of low levels of oxygen, it would provide protection against this lethal range of hypoxia. To examine this possibility, the viability of C. elegans embryos in various concentrations of carbon monoxide was first determined. Despite the toxic effects that high levels of carbon monoxide can have in some systems, C. elegans embryos was found to be remarkably tolerant to a wide range of carbon monoxide tensions. In fact, C. elegans embryos can withstand a continuous exposure to 101 kPa CO (100% CO) for 24 hrs with high viability (81.5% survival to adulthood, FIG. 3). Notably, in 101 kPa CO, embryos did not progress through embryogenesis during the exposure, indicating that they entered into suspended animation. To test whether carbon monoxide could protect embryos in the presence of lethal oxygen tensions, the viability of embryos exposed to 0.05 kPa O2 balanced with carbon monoxide was determined. In contrast to embryos exposed to 0.05 kPa O2 balanced with N2 (most of which do not survive), these embryos recovered with 96.2% viability to adulthood (FIG. 3). Moreover, like embryos treated with 101 kPa CO, embryos in 0.05 kPa O2 balanced with carbon monoxide arrested embryogenesis, indicating that they entered into suspended animation. Therefore, carbon monoxide can protect against hypoxic damage in the presence of lethal oxygen tensions by inducing suspended animation.
  • To further examine the range of oxygen tensions that can be protected by excess carbon monoxide, embryos lacking HIF-1 function (the hif-1(ia04) strain) were used to address whether protection against hypoxic damage was also possible in mild hypoxia. After testing various oxygen tensions between 0.1 kPa O2 and 1 kPa O2 balanced with nitrogen, it was found that the maximal requirement for HIF-1 was in 0.25 kPa O2 balanced with nitrogen. In this atmosphere, wild-type embryos progress normally through development and exhibit high viability, but hif-1(ia04) embryos do not complete embryogenesis and exhibit 100% lethality (Table 3). Therefore, it was examined whether carbon monoxide could protect hif-1(ia04) embryos in 0.25 kPa O2. In 0.25 kPa O2 balanced with carbon monoxide, both wild-type and hif-1(ia04) embryos entered into suspended animation and survived the exposure with high viabilities (78.7% and 84.0% survival to adulthood, respectively) (Table 3). Thus, the induction of suspended animation by carbon monoxide is possible at oxygen tensions as high as 0.25 kPa O2, and carbon monoxide can protect against mild hypoxia, even in the absence of HIF-1 function.
  • TABLE 2
    Quantitation of developmental progression in hypoxia
    Range of
    Percent of embryogenesis
    embryos within (min post
    Atmosphere range 2-cell stage) N
    >0.001 kPa O2/N 2  100% ± 0.0 20-40 min 35
    0.01 kPa O2/N2 92.9% ± 6.0 40-80 min 115
    0.05 kPa O2/N2 97.7% ± 2.0 100-140 min 108
    0.1 kPa O2/N2 91.4% ± 1.3 300-340 min 60

    Wild-type 2-cell embryos were placed into various degrees of hypoxia for 24 hrs and scored for the extent to which they progressed through embryogenesis. Exposure to atmospheres containing increased amounts of oxygen resulted in increased progression through embryogenesis. The percent of embryos that arrested within a given 20-40 minute range of embryogenesis was determined. Data are the result of 3 independent experiments.
  • TABLE 3
    Carbon monoxide protects hif-1 embryos against mild hypoxia
    0.25 kPa O2/N2 n 0.25 kPa O2/CO N
    N2 94.2% ± 1.2 49 78.7% ± 21.9 109
    hif-1 (ia04)  0.0% ± 0.0 68 83.9% ± 13.8 108

    Viabilities to adulthood were assayed following exposure to 24 hrs of 0.25 kPa O2/N2 or 0.25 kPa O2/CO in wild-type and hif-1(ia04) embryos. All data points are the result of at least 3 independent experiments and worms that could not be accounted for were dropped from the total.
  • Viability of Nematodes in Response to Hypothermia.
  • Viability of nematodes is also temperature sensitive, with 100% of a population being dead after a 24 hr exposure to cold temperature (4° C.; FIG. 15). However, if the nematodes are induced into stasis by equilibration into anoxic conditions (<10 ppm oxygen) for 1 hr prior to the temperature drop, a substantial proportion of them survive after a 24 hr exposure to 4° C. (FIG. 15). In this experiment, the nematodes were kept in stasis during the period of hypothermia, and for one hour after they have been returned to room temperature. Anoxic conditions (pure N2), growth conditions, and viability measurements are described below.
  • Example 4 Reduction of Core Body Temperature and Respiration in Mice
  • A. Materials and Methods
  • Implantation of telemetry devices. Female C57BL/6J mice (Jackson Laboratories—Bar Harbor, Me.) were implanted with telemetry devices (PDT-4000 HR E-Mitter—MiniMitter Inc.—Bend, Oreg.) according to standard protocol provided by the manufacturer. Mice were allowed to recover for several weeks to permit body temperature and heart rate signals to stabilize. Core body temperature, heart rate, and movement of the mice were continuously monitored via the telemetry devices and recorded using VitalView software (provided by MiniMitter). Ambient temperature was monitored using a HOBO (Onset Computer Corp.—Pocasset, Mass.) and the data analyzed using BoxCar software (provided by Onset Computer Corp.).
  • Exposure of Mice to Regulated Atmosphere. Each mouse was exposed to 1 L/min of either (a) an atmosphere containing 500 ppm H2S balanced nitrogen (Byrne Specialty Gas—Seattle, Wash.) mixed with room air (using a 3 channel gas proportioner meter from Aalborg—Orangeburg, N.Y.) to give a final concentration of 80 ppm H2S and 17% O2, or (b) an atmosphere of nitrogen mixed with room air to give a final concentration of 17% O2. H2S and O2 measurements were taken using an Innova GasTech GT series portable gas monitor (Thermo Gas Tech—Newark, Calif.).
  • Prior to and during exposure to testing in regulated and unregulated atmospheres, the mice were placed in a gassing chamber comprising a glass cage (with drinking water and no food) fitted with import and export tubes of FEP tubing from Cole-Parmer (Vernon Hills, Ill.) for introduction and venting of the atmosphere. The cage was sealed with a lid using Dow Corning silicone vacuum grease (Sigma—St. Louis, Mo.). The gas from each cage was vented through the export tube into the chemical hood. To ensure that the system was gas-tight, a GasTech GT portable monitor was used to detect leaks.
  • Respirometry. In some experiments, the consumption of oxygen was measured by use of a PA-10a O2 analyzer (Sable Systems) which was used according to manufacturers instructions. Similarly, the carbon dioxide being produced by the animals was monitored using a LI-7000 CO2/H2O analyzer (Li-Cor company) used according to the manufacturers instructions. These instruments were placed in line with the environmental chambers such that they sample the gas import and export tubing.
  • Regulation of Ambient Temperature. Mice were housed in a Shel Lab low temperature diurnal illumination incubator (Sheldon Manufacturing Inc.—Cornelius, Oreg.) to regulate both temperature and light cycle (8 AM lights on, 8 PM lights off) for the mice. Mice were exposed to regulated atmosphere as described above. When the mice were exposed to the regulated atmosphere, the temperature inside the incubator was dropped to the desired temperature, for example, to 10° C. or 15° C. The mice were maintained in the regulated atmosphere and at the lowered temperature for six hours. The atmosphere in the gassing chamber was replaced with room air and the mice were returned to normal room temperature (22° C.) and allowed to recover.
  • B. Results
  • Baseline Data. To determine the response of mice to sub-lethal doses of hydrogen sulfide, the inventor first established baselines of core temperature, heart rate and movement by recording data over a one-week period from four mice with implanted transceivers in the incubator held at ambient temperature and perfused with room air. The baseline data demonstrated that the mice have a circadian rhythm with peak of activity in the evening just after the lights are turned off, and in the early morning just before the lights are turned on. The core temperature varied from a high of 37° C. during their active periods to a low of 33.5° C. during their inactive periods. The heart rate varied from 750 bpm (beats per minute) during their active periods to 250 bpm during their inactive periods. Heart rate is likely to be correlated with core temperature (higher temp higher heart rate). Likewise gross motor movement was highest during the evening and just before dawn.
  • Exposure of Mice to Regulated Atmospheres at Room Temperature. The first trial of the exposure of a mouse to hydrogen sulfide involved first placing the mouse into the gassing chamber held at 27° C. in the incubator for one hour. After the hour, the chamber was perfused with 80 ppm as generally described above and the temperature of the incubator was lowered to 18° C. for the duration of the experiment. While no immediate changes in heart rate and gross motor movement were detected, a dramatic decrease in core temperature was observed. The experiment was allowed to proceed for 90 min. during which time the core temperature dropped to 28.6° C.—five degrees below the lowest recording for any of the four mice in the baseline study described above. During recovery after the chamber was perfused with room air, the inventor noticed that the animal at first was relatively immobile (easy to catch); however within 60 min. it had returned to a normal range of core temperature and activity. A second mouse was exposed to the same protocol; however this time the gassing at 80 ppm was conducted for 3 hrs. During this time, the inventor noted that heart rate dropped significantly from 600 bpm to 250 bpm, gross motor movement showed almost no activity, and the core temperature dropped to 18.6° C.
  • Changes in respiration accompany the drop in core temperature. Exposure of the mice to 80 ppm H2S results in decreased metabolic rate as well, as determined by measuring oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide production. For example, a mouse that had core temperature and carbon dioxide production measured simultaneously, demonstrated a rapid reduction in carbon dioxide production preceding the drop in core temperature of the animal (FIG. 4A). The approximately three-fold reduction in carbon dioxide production established a new baseline in approximately 5 minutes after the exposure to H2S.
  • Table 4 shows results from an experiment with concurrent measurements of O2 and CO2 concentrations from mice exposed to room air that had had the CO2 scrubbed (hence the 0 values for controls), with or without H2S (80 ppm). Measurements were over a period of 15 minutes, with the mice in a 0.5 L sealed environmental chamber with flow rates of 500 cc/min. Consumption of oxygen is obtained by subtracting the oxygen concentration when the mouse is present, from the control when the mouse is absent. Likewise, production of carbon dioxide is obtained by subtracting the carbon dioxide concentration when the mouse is present from the control when the mouse is absent. RQ stands for respiratory quotient, and is equal to the ratio of carbon dioxide produced to oxygen produced. This result demonstrates, a 2-3 fold drop in oxygen consumption in the presence of H2S, as well as a 3-4 fold drop in carbon dioxide production. The change in the respiratory quotient reflects the disparity oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide production by the mice in the presence or absence of the H2S.
  • TABLE 4
    H2S exposure inhibits respiration in mice.
    Mouse present H2S present [O2] ppm [CO2] ppm RQ
    207,000 0
    + 203,600 2800
    Consumption, 3,400 2800 0.82
    production
    + 166,200 0
    + + 164,900 750
    Consumption, 1300 750 0.58
    production
  • The different parameters of stasis (reduction in oxygen consumption, decrease in carbon dioxide production or decrease in motility) can be assessed by a variety of assays and techniques. For example, probably the easiest way to measure the induction of stasis in mice administered H2S is through observation of their breathing. Indeed, this encompasses all three parameters in that it is indicative of decreased oxygen consumption, carbon dioxide production and motility. A normal mouse in room air at standard conditions will take approximately 200 breaths per minute. If H2S is administered to the mouse at 80 ppm, and the core temperature is dropped to 15° C., breathing is decreased at least an order of magnitude to somewhere between 1-10 breaths per minute. In fact, a mouse was observed under these conditions that did not take a breath for a period greater than an hour, indicating that deep levels of stasis are attainable. Thus, this represents at least about a 1-20-fold decrease in cellular respiration (i.e, oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide production).
  • Exposure of Mice to Regulated Atmospheres at Reduced Ambient Temperatures. To begin to define the limits of the capacity for hydrogen sulfide to reduce the activity in mice, the inventor conducted several experiments in which a non-telemetry mouse was used, followed by exposure of a mouse bearing telemetry to acquire the data. The first experiment was to subject a non-telemetry mouse to a regulated atmosphere of H2S at 80 ppm in a reduced cabinet temperature of 10° C. essentially as described in Materials and Methods were as above except that the mouse was placed in the gassing chamber for one hour at 27° C. prior to exposure to the gas and reduction in ambient temperature. The non-telemetry mouse did well in this treatment, and recovered activity within approximately 90 min. after removal from the gassing chamber. The telemetry mouse was subjected to the same conditions also did well, and showed decreased core temperature to approximately 12.5° C. The inventor was unable to accurately determine this temperature because the electronics failed at 15.3° C. The temperature drop to 12.5° C. is therefore an estimation based on the slope of the drop prior to failure and the time the animal remained in the chamber after failure of the electronics.
  • Because of the limitation of the equipment, the inventor next tested each of the four telemetry mice for a 6 hr period in the gassing chamber with a regulated atmosphere containing approximately 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide or with room air essentially as described above. The temperature of the incubator was reduced at initiation of the experiment (exposure to the regulated atmosphere, or time 0 for the mice exposed to room air) to a constant 15° C. At the end of the six-hour period, the mice were returned to an atmosphere of room air and an ambient temperature of 22° C. as generally described above. There was a clear decrease in core body temperature in all four mice that was dependent on the use of 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide (FIG. 4B). There was also a marked drop in heart rate and gross motor movement associated with the decrease in temperature. The mice were maintained for 4 weeks with no apparent change in the behavior of the animals.
  • Example 5 Murine Studies on Reduction of Radiation Injury
  • A. Scientific Rationale
  • While aspects of the radiation injury model can and have been evaluated in cell culture, to test the ability of an experimental drug to affect the injury and healing process requires inclusion of all of the response systems that are affected. At this point in time, the only way to achieve that is in a whole animal. The inventor is proposing the use of mice for such studies as the most appropriate model. The C57BL/6 mice have been selected for study because this strain of mouse is readily susceptible to radiation lung injury, the level of radiation that is tolerated in this strain has been established, and the inventor has recently shown that H2S decreases the core temperature of this mouse strain.
  • Two identical experiments are planned under this protocol. Each experiment will investigate the efficacy of H2S-induced hypothermia on the development of radiation induced lung injury. Ten mice per group will be exposed to one of four test conditions (H2S/17.5 Gy thoracic irradiation, H2S/no thoracic irradiation, no H2S/17.5 Gy thoracic irradiation, or no H2S/no thoracic irradiation), then followed for 13 weeks. Twelve animals per group will be similarly exposed and followed for 26 weeks (the increased n is required to compensate for the increased mortality that occurs late in the course of the disease).
  • For these experiments, analysis of variance (ANOVA) will be used as the statistical model for data analysis. A completely crossed and randomized two factor ANOVA with 4 groups (irradiated or non-irradiated mice receiving H2S or not receiving H2S) and two time intervals (13 or 26 weeks) will be used to analyze temporal changes in bronchioalveolar lavage inflammatory cell number and total protein concentration and lung hydroxyproline levels. Assuming 80% power, 5% significance and a two-tailed test, five surviving mice per combination of injury group, intervention group and time point will allow a detectable difference among group means greater than or equal to 1.7 times the underlying within-group standard deviation. The within-group standard deviation is expected to be equal to about 25%. Thus, changes in inflammatory cell numbers or lung collagen content of 35-50% of control values should be discernable in these experiments.
  • H2S exposure and thoracic irradiation will be done in SLU AHR in a linear accelerator suite. Bronchoalveolar lavage and lung procurement at necropsy will be performed in the AHR mouse necropsy room. Bronchoalveolar lavage cell counts and protein concentrations and lung hydroxyproline content measurements will be performed in the another lab (D3-255). Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will receive 17.5 Gy of thoracic irradiation. Mice will be anesthetized with intraperitoneal Avertin, placed into individual cloth mouse restrains and irradiated via the linear accelerator with 8.5 Gy at a dose rate of 3 Gy/min through two lateral fields collimated to target the thorax only (total thoracic dose 17.5 Gy).
  • B. Protocol
  • Anesthesia. Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will be anesthetized for intratracheal dosing with Isoflurane. The depth of anesthesia will be monitored by respiratory rate for response to tactile stimulation. Intraperitoneal injection of Avertin (0.4-0.7 ml/mouse i.p.) will be used to anesthetize animals for the thoracic irradiation procedure. The depth of anesthesia will be monitored by respiratory rate and response to tactile stimulation.
  • Exposure to hydrogen sulfide. Mice will be placed into a closed plexiglass gassing chamber similar to the one used previously for mice (IR1606). The chamber will have two ports (import and export). A gas containing H2S (80 ppm) balanced with room air will be vented through the chamber at a rate of 1 liter per minute. The gas will be vented from the room using the house ventilation system with a hose that extends from the export vent to the exhaust vent for the room.
  • Hazardous agent administration. Mice will be irradiated while they are in the gassing chamber with a total dose of 17.5 Gray using the linear accelerator. This radiation dose will induce an subacute pulmonary injury in the mice which progresses to fibrosis. The mice will not be radioactive or otherwise provide a hazard to personnel or other animals. No special monitoring, containment or disposal is required due to the irradiation.
  • Scheduled euthanasia. At approximately weeks 13 and 26 after thoracic irradiation, the animals will be euthanized by deep anesthesia (using avertin 0.4-0.7 ml i.p.) followed by exsanguination via inferior vena cava puncture. Bronchoalveolar lavage will be performed to determine inflammatory cell number, differential counts and lavage fluid protein concentrations. Lung and esophagus tissue will be removed for histologic evaluation and collagen content analysis.
  • Moribund animals. Thoracic radiation is associated with a finite mortality rate in mice, with 15% dying by week 10 and 50% by week 22 post irradiation. The investigators will monitor the animals daily for adverse effects (2-3 times per day initially, until they appear stable, then once daily until disease begins to progress, at which point the inventor will return to multiple daily observations). If an animal is losing weight, failing to groom, exhibiting severe respiratory distress, and/or awkward or significantly diminished movement, it will be euthanized with an avertin overdose. When practical, bronchioalveolar lavage and tissue collection for histology will be performed for these unscheduled euthanasias.
  • Thoracic irradiation should produce a lung injury which itself is not painful but may manifest itself (week 10) by increased respiratory rate, mild appetite loss, mild weight loss and/or failure to groom. The investigators and animal facility staff will monitor the animals daily for such adverse effects. If an animal does not seem to be eating, soft food and fluid support will be provided. If the animal is perceived to be in pain, analgesia with Butorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures do not lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately. Lung and esophagus tissue will be collected for histopathologic evaluation and collagen content analysis at the scheduled necropsies.
  • Post-irradiation Husbandry. To minimize the risk of transmitting any pathogens to the rest of the facility, and to protect these animals while they are somewhat immunocompromised, all husbandry work on these animals will be done first thing each day (before any other animals in the facility) and will be done in a biosafety cabinet. To minimize the risk of adventitious infections, the mice will have autoclaved cages and bedding. In addition, they will be fed standard rodent food that has been irradiated to kill pathogens.
  • Wild genotype C57BL/6 mice will receive 17.5 Gy of thoracic irradiation. Mice will be anesthetized with intraperitoneal Avertin, placed into individual cloth mouse restraints and moved into a closed plexiglass gassing chamber similar to the one used previously for mice (IR1606). The chamber will have two ports (import and export). A gas containing H2S (80 ppm) balanced with room air will be vented through the chamber at a rate of 1 liter per minute. The gas will be vented from the room using the house ventilation system with a hose that extends from the export vent to the exhaust vent for the room. Once in the gassing chamber the mice will be irradiated via the linear accelerator with 8.5 Gy at a dose rate of 3 Gy/min through two lateral fields collimated to target the thorax only (total thoracic dose 17.5 Gy). After completion of thoracic irradiation the animals will be returned to their micro-isolater cages monitored until recovered from anesthesia.
  • Scheduled necropsises. One set of animals will be necropsied in week 13 post-irradiation to evaluate the inflammatory phase of the injury. The second set will be euthanized in week 26 to evaluate the fibrotic phase of the injury. Animals will be anesthetized with avertin, then exsanguinated. The lungs will be lavaged with 1000 ul PBS and the lavage fluid kept on ice for total and differential cell counts. The right lung will then be harvested for hydroxyproline content and the left lung will be infused with 10% NBF at 25-30 cm pressure through the trachea. The esophagus, trachea, left lung and heart will be immersed in 10% NBF and set to the FHCRC histology shared resource lab for processing and pathology evaluation.
  • Thoracic irradiation should produce a lung injury which itself is not painful but may manifest itself (week 10) by increased respiratory rate, mild appetite loss, mild weight loss and/or failure to groom. The investigators and animal facility staff will monitor the animals daily for such adverse effects. If an animal does not seem to be eating, soft food and fluid support will be provided. If the animal is perceived to be in pain, analgesia with Batorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures don't lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately by CO2 asphyxiation.
  • The primary problems are likely to be esophagitis (resulting in decreased food and water intake) and respiratory insufficiency (reducing oxygen uptake). The inventor will be checking these animals 2-3 times per day until they are convinced that they are stable and doing well, at which point the inventor may reduce the frequency of checks to once daily, until the disease begins to progress, at which point they return to multiple daily checks. Supportive care will be provided in several ways. If an animal is not eating or drinking well (evidenced by weight loss and grooming problems), the inventor will provide soft food and try fluid supplementation (Lactated Ringer's solution, 1-2 ml/mouse, sc using a small bore needle (>20 G), 1-2 times daily). If the animal is perceived to be in pain, analgesia with Batorphanol (0.2 mg/kg i.p.) or Buphrenorphine (1.0 mg/kg bid s.q.) will be administered as needed. If an animal appears to be suffering and palliative measures do not lead to improvement, it will be euthanized immediately by CO2 asphyxiation. In the event that an animal experiences significant pain or distress at the time of thoracic irradiation, the animal will be euthanized by CO2 asphyxiation.
  • A third experiment was to subject a telemetry mouse to a regulated atmosphere of H2S at 80 ppm in a reduced cabinet temperature of 10.5° C. essentially as described above. During the experiment, the mouse was visually observed and its movements were recorded by web camera, and telemetry measurements were recorded as described above. The mouse was exposed to a regulated atmosphere of 80 ppm H2S, and the temperature of the cabinet was reduced to a constant 10.5° C. At the end of an approximately six-hour period, heat was applied to the cabinet by setting the cabinet temperature to 25° C. The mouse was allowed to warm up in the regulated H2S atmosphere until the core temperature of the mouse was between 17° C. and 18° C. after which time the regulated atmosphere was replaced with room air. There was a clear decrease in core body temperature of the mouse to 10.5° C. in the regulated atmosphere accompanied by a marked drop gross motor movement. The respiration rate dropped to an undetectable rate by visual observation for approximately one hour and fifteen minutes. After the cabinet was warmed, weak respiration was observed when the core body temperature of the mouse achieved 14° C. During the warming phase, when the core body temperature rose to between 17° C. and 18° C., and the mouse was exhibiting respiration and movement, the regulated atmosphere was replaced with room air. Normal movement and respiration were fully apparent when the core body temperature returned to 25° C. The mouse has exhibited no apparent change in the behavior compared to animals that were untreated.
  • Example 6 Cell and Mammal Studies
  • A. Canine Studies
  • Canine studies will be conducted with dogs surgically implanted with telemetry devices to monitor their core body temperature. The animals will be studied in the presence or absence of a sub-lethal dose of hydrogen sulfide for 10 hrs. During this time, they will be continuously monitored for vital signs by telemetry. The temperature of the environment will also be reduced to 15° C. for 30 min to determine whether this has any effect on the core body temperature of the animals.
  • The procedure will be conducted with 2 groups of 2 dogs (four total). Because of the expense of the telemetry equipment the inventor will do these experiments in succession. If the results from the first group indicate that the hypothesis is incorrect, the study will be repeated with the second group of two dogs. If the results from the second group do not support the hypothesis, the project will be discontinued.
  • Toxicology studies demonstrate that, while the level of H2S is above the OSHA limit for humans (10 ppm), it has been shown previously that exposure of both rats and mice to 80 ppm of H2S for 6 hrs per day, 5 days per week, for 90 days, showed no observed adverse effect. This included both gross and histopathological examination of the gut, lung, heart, liver, kidneys, or other organs conducted at the end of the treatment. To the inventor's knowledge, no information is available concerning exposure of dogs to hydrogen sulfide.
  • A critical issue in working with H2S is to not exceed the dose (80 ppm) described by others who have published studies on rodents exposed to hydrogen sulfide and not seen detrimental effects. There is considerable experience in gas sciences available, and the inventor is capable of delivering the gas to the mice at the prescribed dose. Many precautions are taken to ensure that both animals and investigators are not harmed. These precautions include constant monitoring of the gas mixture with alarm set to OSHA limits and sensitivity to 1 ppm, and a variety of equipment that is able to mix and deliver the gas according to specifications without leakage into or out of the system.
  • A time line for the protocol is given in Table 5.
  • TABLE 5
    Study Time Line
    Day Activity Detail
    −1 Pre-surgery A CBC/Chemistry will be performed; dog will be fasted in p.m.,
    but allowed free access to water.
    0 Surgery Fentanyl transdermal patch placed p.m. of day before surgery
    for preemptive analgesia. Preoperative placement of cephalic
    catheter; premedication with Acepromazine, Buprenorphine,
    Glycopyrrolate; induction with either Ketamine:Diazepam or
    Propofol to permit intubation; maintenance anesthesia by
    isoflurane and oxygen. Dog will be placed in dorsal
    recumbancy and the abdomen clipped/prepped and draped.
    Monitoring of pulse, respiration rates, end-tidal carbone dioxide,
    inhaled percentage of anesthetic agent, SpO2 will be performed
    and recorded every 15 minutes or more frequently. Fluid
    support during and after surgery will occur. Once the dog is
    stable and appropriately prepared for the procedure, a ventral
    midline laparotomy, beginning caudal to the umbilicus and
    extending 5-10 cm caudally, will be performed. A sterile
    transmitter will be placed into the peritoneal cavity. Placement
    will be checked to insure that the transmitter is able to move
    freely; the omentum will be replaced, and closure of the
    peritoneal cavity will be performed in 3 layers. The dog will be
    monitored until it is extubated, is able to thermoregulate and is
    sternally recumbent. Daily monitoring of the dog's incision site,
    abdomen (via palpation and ultrasound, if indicated), appetite,
    temperature (for the first 3-5 post-operative days), weight and
    activity will be performed.
    7 Establishment This date is flexible. Will only proceed with this step with
    of Baselines approval. Four animals will be placed onto the receiver
    equipment (this does not involve removal of the animals from
    their cages and will occur in AHR) and baselines for the vital
    signs will be established for all four animals.
    8 Exposure to Animals will be transferred to a room to be determined where
    H2S they will be placed into caging with food and water that has an
    enclosed atmosphere. After establishing baselines two of the
    four animals will be subjected to H2S at a concentration of 80 ppm.
    Following a ten-hour exposure, the atmosphere will be
    returned to room air temperature and the animals will be
    returned to their cages. Exposure to H2S will repeated once per
    week to begin to determine whether any data set is reproducible.
  • B. Human Platelets
  • To test the concept that using inhibitors of oxidative phosphorylation could be used for human benefit, the inventor induced a state of suspended animation in human tissues to protect them from lethal exposure to oxygen. In pilot experiments, the inventor placed human skin in an environment of 100% CO. The inventor observes that after 24 hrs skin cells survive 100-fold better in CO than those in room air. These results are very exciting; they provide evidence that inhibitors of oxidative phosphorylation can be effective in human tissues.
  • Another set of experiments demonstrates the protective effects of induced suspended animation on platelets. A unit of platelets was split in half. The first half was kept at standard storage conditions, which involves keeping the platelets at room temperature (22-25° C.) with constant shaking The other half was placed inside an anoxic environment (<10 ppm oxygen) using standard methods to remove the oxygen. The two sets of platelets were compared on days 0, 5 and 8. The platelets kept in anoxic conditions performed as well or better than those kept at standard conditions over a panel of five different in vitro tests, including the ability to aggregate, cell morphology, Annexin-V staining (phosphatidyl-serine flipping to the outer membrane as an early apoptotic marker), and so on. This indicates that controlling metabolic activity, specifically oxidative phosphorylation, can be accomplished by the removal of oxygen and has a protective effect on cellular function over long periods of stasis.
  • Hydrogen sulfide is able to bind cytochrome C oxidase as well as CO and stop oxidative phosphorylation on demand. It is so potent at impeding oxidative phosphorylation, that should a person take a single breath in an atmosphere with 0.1% hydrogen sulfide, they will not take another. Instead, they immediately collapse to the floor—an event commonly referred to in industrial settings as a “knock down.” It also appears to be reversible because, if rapidly removed to fresh air (and uninjured from the fall) these individuals can sometimes reanimate and go on to live without neurological problems. Here is an agent that is not only common in our world, indeed, is produced even in our own cells, but is also a potent reversible inhibitor of oxidative phosphorylation that does not effect oxygen delivery.
  • C. Murine Studies
  • Induction of a Hibernation-Like State Using H2S. Homeothermic animals, by definition, maintain a core body temperature 10-30° C. above the ambient temperature. For these animals to do this, they must generate heat from the energy produced by oxidative phosphorylation. The terminal enzyme complex in oxidative phosphorylation is cytochrome c oxidase. Since hydrogen sulfide inhibits this complex (Petersen, 1977; Khan et al., 1990), the inventor predicts that exposing a homeothermic animal to hydrogen sulfide will prevent such an animal from maintaining its core body temperature well above ambient temperatures.
  • To test this hypothesis, the inventor wanted to continuously monitor both the core body temperature and the activity levels of a homeothermic animal (a mouse). Telemetry devices, implanted into the peritonea of mice, can do both of these things and have the advantage of not introducing bias to the readings due to the handling of the mice (Briese, 1998). Additionally, they can remotely monitor the mice during the exposure to the hydrogen sulfide gas. A dose of 80 parts per million (ppm) hydrogen sulfide has been previously shown to be innocuous to mice for exposures lasting up to ten weeks (CIIT 1983; Hays, 1972). Therefore, for these experiments the inventor used a dose of 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide to test our hypothesis. Creating an atmosphere containing 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide is not trivial. Over time, in the presence of oxygen, hydrogen sulfide will be oxidized to sulfate. For that reason, in order for the inventor to continuously expose a mouse to an atmosphere containing 80 ppm hydrogen sulfide, the inventor constantly mixes room air with a tank of 500 ppm hydrogen sulfide balanced nitrogen.
  • Characterization of Core Temperature Control
  • Exposing a mouse to 80 ppm H2S dropped its core temperature to approximately two degrees Celsius above ambient (FIG. 5A). This effect was highly reproducible as the average core body temperature of seven mice exposed to 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide for 6 hrs followed a similar pattern (FIG. 5A). The lowest average core body temperature of these seven mice was 15° C. in an ambient temperature of 13° C. All of these mice successfully recovered after rewarming when the atmosphere was switched to one containing only room air. As a control, the inventor substituted nitrogen for the hydrogen sulfide and did not see the substantial drop in core body temperature.
  • Although these mice appear superficially normal despite temporary decrease in both core body temperature and breathing rate, the inventor conducted a battery of behavior tests to rule out the possibility that neurological damage was incurred by either the exposure to hydrogen sulfide gas, the extreme reduction in core body temperature, the reduction in breathing rate, or the combination of these effects. All of the tests were performed on the mice both before and after exposure to hydrogen sulfide. These behavior tests were selected from the SHIRPA protocol developed by the Mouse Models for Human Disease consortium (Rogers et al., 1997). There were no detectable behavioral differences in the mice after gas exposure. From this, the inventor concluded that entry into a hibernation-like state is not detrimental.
  • Preliminary Optimization of H2S Dose. The above experiments describe the effect of 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide on the core body temperature of a mouse. In order to determine the concentration of hydrogen sulfide sufficient for the loss of thermoregulation, the inventor exposed mice to a range of hydrogen sulfide concentrations (20 ppm, 40 ppm, 60 ppm, and 80 ppm), (FIG. 6). While 20 ppm and 40 ppm of hydrogen sulfide were sufficient to cause a drop in the core body temperature of a mouse, this was minor compared to the drop seen with 60 ppm and 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide. From this experiment, the inventor concluded that the loss of thermogenesis is directly dependent upon the concentration of hydrogen sulfide given to the mice. This preliminary study on the dose range and pharmacokinetics of hydrogen sulfide emphasizes the need for a more comprehensive analysis.
  • Preliminary Definition of Low Core Temperature Limit. The inventor is also interested in establishing a more complete understanding of the tolerance of both the range of core body temperatures and the length of time allowed in this state for mice. The experiments above show that the inventor can repeatedly lower the core body temperature of a mouse to 13-15° C. on demand. Furthermore, the mice seem to tolerate the treatment for many hours. Using the same protocol, while lowering the ambient temperature, the inventor has successfully brought the core body temperature of a mouse to 10.7° C. (FIG. 7). Further attempts to push core body temperatures even lower, and for longer periods of time, will be performed in the future. Although preliminary, these results demonstrate that there is a significant range of core body temperatures allowed by mouse biology and that this range can be explored through the loss of thermoregulation due to hydrogen sulfide exposure.
  • Modulation of Endogenous H2S Levels. It is well known that mammalian cells make hydrogen sulfide endogenously (Wang 2002). Since this chemical is dynamically produced in the cell, it is crucial to understand the basal levels under different conditions as this could dramatically affect the pharmacokinetics of exogenously administered hydrogen sulfide. To address this essential aspect of our research, the inventor has begun to assay endogenous hydrogen sulfide levels in the mouse. The inventor uses an extractive alkylation technique coupled with gas chromatography and mass specific detection to quantify hydrogen sulfide (Hyspler et al., 2002). Using this method, the inventor looked at the levels of hydrogen sulfide in unperturbed mice. FIG. 8A shows that there is a significant amount of hydrogen sulfide within the mouse. Additionally, the levels of hydrogen sulfide appear to be dependent upon the ambient temperature of the mouse. Specifically, when mice are in the cold, they have reduced endogenous sulfide levels and, when mice are at warm ambient temperatures, they have increased endogenous sulfide levels. From this, the inventor concludes that mice regulate their sulfide levels in response to the ambient temperature.
  • Changes in Endogenous Levels Affect the Efficacy of H2S. Since the ambient temperature changes the endogenous levels of sulfide in mice, the inventors hypothesized that the ambient temperature might impact the changes in core body temperature upon exposure to exogenous hydrogen sulfide. Acclimatizing a mouse to cold temperatures, ˜12° C., creates a longlasting plateau that the inventor sees after the initial drop in core body temperature (FIG. 8B). Therefore it appears that this acclimatization to the cold made the mouse more resistant to core body cooling by the action of hydrogen sulfide gas. However, allowing the mouse to acclimatize to a warm thermoneutral temperature prior to gas exposure eliminates this plateau. In fact, the normothermic mouse cooled much more quickly when exposed to hydrogen sulfide than the cold-acclimated mouse (FIG. 8B). These data suggest that endogenous levels of hydrogen sulfide in the mouse have a direct impact upon the efficacy of the exogenous hydrogen sulfide.
  • H2S protects mice from hypoxia. Normal room air contains approximately 21% oxygen. In a preliminary experiment exploring the protective effects of stasis on hypoxia in the mouse model, a mouse exposed to 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide survived 11 minutes of 5.2% oxygen and 3 weeks later, it was still doing well. Previously published work shows that 90% of these animals (C57B1) exposed in this way without hydrogen sulfide do not survive (Zhang et al., 2004). This experiment involved pre-equilibrating the mouse to 80 ppm H2S for 3 hours, then dropping the oxygen tension in the chamber as described in experiments above. The same flow rates were used as described above (i.e., 500 cc/mL in a 0.5 L chamber). It is well established in those familiar with the field that if a group of mice are exposed to 4% oxygen, 100% will be dead within 15 minutes. However, mice in which H2S is administered during periods when the oxygen tension is reduced to 4%, remain viable, even for extended periods (up to an hour) in these hypoxic conditions. The mice appear to be unaffected by these conditions after recovery, and are viable and normally responsive when tested 24 hours later. This experiment differs from the one above in that the mice were retained in the H2S at the end of the hypoxic exposure until the oxygen tensions were returned to normal levels (21% O2).
  • All of the compositions and methods disclosed and claimed herein can be made and executed without undue experimentation in light of the present disclosure. While the compositions and methods of this invention have been described in terms of preferred embodiments, it will be apparent to those of skill in the art that variations may be applied to the compositions and methods, and in the steps or in the sequence of steps of the methods described herein without departing from the concept, spirit and scope of the invention. More specifically, it will be apparent that certain agents which are both chemically and physiologically related may be substituted for the agents described herein while the same or similar results would be achieved. All such similar substitutes and modifications apparent to those skilled in the art are deemed to be within the spirit, scope and concept of the invention as defined by the appended claims.
  • REFERENCES
  • The following references, to the extent that they provide exemplary procedural or other details supplementary to those set forth herein, are specifically incorporated herein by reference.
    • U.S. Pat. No. 3,777,507
    • U.S. Pat. No. 3,881,990
    • U.S. Pat. No. 3,995,444
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,034,753
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,186,565
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,266,573
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,292,817
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,442,856
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,447,415
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,473,637
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,502,295
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,559,258
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,759
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,798,824
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,828,976
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,938,961
    • U.S. Pat. No. 4,951,482
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,066,578
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,157,930
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,217,860
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,231,025
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,285,657
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,326,706
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,370,989
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,395,314
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,399,363
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,405,742
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,470,738
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,763
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,158
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,552,267
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,568,910
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,569,579
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,781
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,599,659
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,636,643
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,515
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,645,081
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,693,462
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,699,793
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,719,174
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,736,397
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,169
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,752,929
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,801,005
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,880
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,945
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,019
    • U.S. Pat. No. 5,952,168
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,013,256
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,046,046
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,046,046
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,261
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,057,148
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,100,082
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,529
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,365,338
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,490,880
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,492,103
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,524,785
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,552,083
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,277
    • U.S. Pat. No. 6,790,603
    • Alam, Antioxid Redox Signal,. 4(4):559-62, 2002.
    • Amersi et al., Hepatology, 35(4):815-823, 2002.
    • Austin-Ward and Villaseca, Revista Medica de Chile, 126(7):838-845, 1998.
    • Behringer et al., Crit. Care Med., 31(5):1523-1531, 2003.
    • Bellamy et al., Crit. Care Med., 24(2 Suppl):524-47, 1996.
    • Bernard et al., J. Thorac. Cardiovasc. Surg. 90:235-242, 1985.
    • Boyce and Ham, J. Invest. Dermatol., 81:335-405, 1983.
    • Boyce and Ham, J. Tissue Culture Methods, 9:83-93, 1985.
    • Briese, Neurosci. Biobehay. Rev., 22(3):427-436, 1998.
    • Brizel, Seminars Radiation Oncol., 8(4Suppl):17-20, 1998.
    • Brouard et al., J. Biol. Chem., 277(20):17950-17961, 2002.
    • Bukowski et al., Clinical Cancer Res., 4(10):2337-2347, 1998.
    • Christodoulides et al., Microbiology, 144(Pt 11):3027-3037, 1998.
    • CIIT (Chemical Industry Institute of Toxicology), In: 90 day vapor inhalation toxicity study of hydrogen sulfide, Toxigenics, 420-0710, 1983.
    • Curran, Seminars Radiation Oncol., 8(4Suppl):2-4, 1998.
    • Davidson et al., J. Immunother., 21(5):389-398, 1998.
    • Dillman, Cancer Biother. Radiopharm., 14(1):5-10, 1999.
    • Dorman et al. Neurotoxicol. Teratol., 22(1):71-84, 2000.
    • Dulak et al., Antioxid. Redox Signal, 4(2):229-240, 2002.
    • Eto et al., Biochem. Biphys. Res. Commun., 293:1483-1488, 2002.
    • Ganther, Carcinogenesis 20(9):1657-66 (1999)
    • Gilbert et al., LANCET, 355:375-376, 2000.
    • Gorman et al., Toxicology, 187(1):25-38, 2003.
    • Guillemin et al., Cell, 89(1):9-12, 1997.
    • Haase et al., Annals of Surgery, 240(2):364-373, 2004.
    • Hanibuchi et al., Intl. J. Cancer, 78(4):480-45, 1998.
    • Hays, In: Studies of the Effects of Atmospheric Hydrogen Sulfide in Animals, thesis dissertation, University of Missouri-Columbia, 1972.
    • Hellstrand et al., Acta Oncologica, 37(4):347-353, 1998.
    • Higuchi and Fukamachi, Folia Pharmacologica Japonica, 73(3):307-319, 1977.
    • Hochachka et al., Comp. Biochem. Physiol. B Biochem. Mol. Biol., 130(4):435-459, 2001.
    • Hochachka et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 93(18):9493-94938, 1996.
    • Hui and Hashimoto, Infection Immun., 66(11):5329-5336, 1998.
    • Hyspler et al., J. Chromatography, 770:255-259, 2002.
    • Jiang et al., Am. J. Physiol. Cell Physiol., 280:1140-1150, 2001.
    • Ju et al., J. Neuropathol. Exp. Neurol., 59(3):241-50, 2000.
    • Khan et al., Toxicol. Applied Pharmacol., 103:482-490, 1990.
    • Kilburn and Warshaw, Toxicology Indust. Health, 11(2):185-197, 1995.
    • Kilburn, Environ. Health, 54(3):150, 1999
    • Kilburn, Environ. Res., 81(2):92-99, 1999.
    • Kubulus et al., In: The mechanism of the delay phenomenon: tissue protection is mediated by heme oxygenase-1, Institute for Clinical Experimental Surgery, Univ. of Saarland, Germany, 1-21, 2004.
    • Kuroda et al., Transplantation, 46(3):457-460, 1988.
    • Kuroda et al., Transplantation, 46(3):457-460, 1988.
    • Ledingham et al., Circulation 82 (Part 2)IV351-8, 1990.
    • Ledingham et al., Circulation, 82(2):IV351-358, 1990.
    • Ledingham et al., J. Thorac. Cardiobasc. Surg. 93:240-246, 1987.
    • Ledingham et al., J. Thorac. Cardiobasc. Surg., 93:240-246, 1987.
    • Lundgren-Eriksson et al., Anticancer Res. 2001 September-October;21(5):3269-74
    • Menasche et al., Eur. J. Cardio. Thorax. Surg. 8:207-213, 1994.
    • Menasche et al., Eur. J. Cardio. Thorax. Surg., 8:207-213, 1994
    • Nystul et al., Science, 302(5647):1038-1041, 2003.
    • Otterbein et al., Am. J. Physiol. Lung Cell Mol. Physiol., 279(6):L1029-L1037, 2000.
    • Otterbein et al., Trends Immunol., 24(8):449-455, 2003.
    • Padilla et al., Molec. Biology of the Cell, 13:1473-1483, 2002.
    • Padilla et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 98(13):7331-7335., 2001.
    • Partlo et al., Neurotoxicology, 22(2):177-189, 2001.
    • Petersen, Biochemica et Biophysica Acta, 460:299-307, 1977.
    • Pietras et al., Oncogene, 17(17):2235-2249, 1998.
    • Qin et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 95(24):14411-14416, 1998.
    • Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th ed., pages 1035-1038 and 1570-1580, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1980.
    • Roger et al., Genome, 8:711-713, 1997.
    • Ryter and Otterbein, BioEssays, 26:270-280, 2004.
    • Semenza, Cell, 98(3):281-284, 1999.
    • Semenza, Trends Mol. Med., 7(8):345-350, 2001.
    • Struve et al., Neurotoxicology, 22(3):375-385, 2001.
    • Teodoro and OFarrell, EMBO J., 22(3):580-587, 2003.
    • Tisherman, Crit. Care Med., 32(2):S46-S50, 2004.
    • Van Voorhies et al., J. Exp. Biol., 203(Pt 16):2467-2478, 2000.
    • Wang, FASEB J., 16(13):1792-1798, 2002.
    • Zhang et al., J. Appl. Physiol. 96(1):392-397, 2004.

Claims (11)

1-130. (canceled)
131. A method for inducing growth in integumentary tissue comprising:
a) isolating integumentary tissue; and
b) exposing the tissue to an oxygen antagonist, wherein the oxygen antagonist is carbon monoxide; thereby inducing growth in integumentary tissue.
132. The method of claim 131, wherein the effective amount is a sublethal dose of the oxygen antagonist.
133. The method of claim 131, wherein the oxygen antagonist is a gas, semi-solid liquid, or liquid.
134. The method of claim 133, wherein the oxygen antagonist is a gas.
135. The method of claim 131, further comprising subjecting the tissue to a controlled temperature environment.
136. The method of claim 135, further comprising modulating environmental oxygen levels or removing the tissue from an environment having oxygen.
137. The method of claim 131, further comprising assessing the level of the oxygen antagonist and/or oxidative phosphorylation in the tissue.
138. The method of claim 131, further comprising removing the oxygen antagonist.
139. The method of claim 131, further comprising placing the tissue under a vacuum.
140. The method of claim 131, wherein the tissue is damaged.
US13/165,600 2003-10-22 2011-06-21 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs Abandoned US20120052479A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/165,600 US20120052479A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2011-06-21 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US51345803P 2003-10-22 2003-10-22
US54815004P 2004-02-26 2004-02-26
US57794204P 2004-06-08 2004-06-08
US10/972,063 US7993681B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2004-10-22 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs
US13/165,600 US20120052479A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2011-06-21 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/972,063 Continuation US7993681B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2004-10-22 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20120052479A1 true US20120052479A1 (en) 2012-03-01

Family

ID=34557350

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/972,063 Expired - Fee Related US7993681B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2004-10-22 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs
US13/165,600 Abandoned US20120052479A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2011-06-21 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/972,063 Expired - Fee Related US7993681B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2004-10-22 Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (2) US7993681B2 (en)
EP (5) EP1684580A2 (en)
JP (3) JP4914216B2 (en)
CN (1) CN1901795B (en)
AU (4) AU2004285468B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0415752A (en)
CA (3) CA2542426A1 (en)
HK (1) HK1216284A1 (en)
WO (3) WO2005039291A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070078113A1 (en) * 2005-04-20 2007-04-05 Roth Mark B Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
WO2020186206A1 (en) * 2019-03-13 2020-09-17 Membrane Protective Technologies, Inc. Methods and systems for protective supplementation during temperature depression

Families Citing this family (39)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7635676B2 (en) * 2001-02-21 2009-12-22 Alavita Pharmaccuticals, Inc. Modified annexin proteins and methods for their use in organ transplantation
US7645739B2 (en) 2001-02-21 2010-01-12 Alavita Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified annexin compositions and methods of using same
US20090291086A1 (en) * 2001-02-21 2009-11-26 Alavita Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and Methods for Treating Cerebral Thrombosis and Global Cerebral Ischemia
US7635680B2 (en) * 2001-02-21 2009-12-22 Alavita Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Attenuation of reperfusion injury
WO2002101018A2 (en) * 2001-06-11 2002-12-19 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods for inducing reversible stasis
US20050170019A1 (en) * 2003-10-22 2005-08-04 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells
US20050136125A1 (en) * 2003-10-22 2005-06-23 Roth Mark B. Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
AU2004285468B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2011-02-24 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US20070003528A1 (en) * 2005-06-29 2007-01-04 Paul Consigny Intracoronary device and method of use thereof
WO2007033082A2 (en) 2005-09-12 2007-03-22 Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions comprising dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso)
US8480797B2 (en) 2005-09-12 2013-07-09 Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Activated carbon systems for facilitating use of dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) by removal of same, related compounds, or associated odors
AU2006291134C1 (en) 2005-09-12 2013-08-15 Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Systems for removing dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) or related compounds, or odors associated with same
WO2007033180A1 (en) 2005-09-12 2007-03-22 Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Materials for facilitating administration of dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso) and related compounds
GB0520176D0 (en) * 2005-10-04 2005-11-09 Imp College Innovations Ltd Use
JP2009534422A (en) * 2006-04-20 2009-09-24 フレッド ハッチンソン キャンサー リサーチ センター Use of chalcogenide to treat shock and other adverse conditions
US8006406B2 (en) * 2006-08-01 2011-08-30 ISCD Holding, L.P. Drying system
WO2008040002A2 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-04-03 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for hif modulating compounds
NZ575671A (en) 2006-10-05 2011-04-29 Ikaria Inc Liquid chalcogenide compositions and methods of manufacturing and using the same
US7923037B2 (en) 2006-10-05 2011-04-12 Ikaria, Inc. Liquid chalcogenide compositions and methods of manufacturing and using the same
EP2170356A1 (en) * 2007-06-25 2010-04-07 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods and compositions regarding polychalcogenide compositions
ES2329329B1 (en) 2008-05-23 2010-09-17 Institut Quimic De Sarria Cets, Fundacio Privada THERMOPLASTIC PASTE FOR REPAIR LIVING FABRICS.
WO2010005968A1 (en) * 2008-07-07 2010-01-14 Rich Products Corporation Method for storage of live crustaceans
US8158339B2 (en) * 2008-07-07 2012-04-17 Rich Products Corporation Method of preserving a platelet concentrate under elevated xenon concentration and pressure with refrigeration
BRPI0921494A2 (en) 2008-11-03 2018-10-30 Prad Reasearch And Development Ltd method of planning a underground forming sampling operation, method of controlling a underground forming sampling operation, method of controlling a drilling operation for an underground formation, and method of sampling during the drilling operation.
WO2010146547A1 (en) * 2009-06-16 2010-12-23 Biomas Ltd. Tellurium-containing compounds for facilitating transplantation
EP2493314B1 (en) 2009-10-30 2020-04-08 Abela Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Dimethyl sulfoxide (dmso) and methylsulfonylmethane (msm) formulations to treat osteoarthritis
JP2012046470A (en) * 2010-08-30 2012-03-08 Japan Science & Technology Agency Enzyme activity inhibitor for gapdh
WO2012109107A1 (en) * 2011-02-07 2012-08-16 Rich Products Corporation Method for preserving cells and cell cultures
AR088166A1 (en) 2011-09-26 2014-05-14 Rich Products Corp METHOD FOR THE PRESERVATION OF LIVE FABRIC
US10433538B2 (en) * 2012-10-12 2019-10-08 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Compositions and methods for organ preservation
CN102960335B (en) * 2012-10-22 2013-12-25 同济大学附属上海市肺科医院 Device used for preserving lung under low temperature and ventilated situations during non-heart-beating-donor lung transplant
EP2934111B1 (en) * 2012-12-19 2020-03-25 Rich Technologies Holding Company, LLC Platelet concentrate preservation method
US10076620B2 (en) 2012-12-22 2018-09-18 Dmf Medical Incorporated Anesthetic circuit having a hollow fiber membrane
CN106102836B (en) 2014-02-10 2020-02-04 弗雷德哈钦森癌症研究中心 Halogen treatment of heart attack and ischemic injury
CA2980316A1 (en) 2015-03-24 2016-09-29 Osiris Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions comprising meniscal tissues and uses thereof
KR101755255B1 (en) * 2015-04-30 2017-07-07 연세대학교 원주산학협력단 Method and composition for inducing a long-time hypometabolism and fish transportation method using thereof
CA3082358A1 (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-23 Safetin Ltd System and method for carbon monoxide atmosphere stored blood components
MX2021014874A (en) 2019-06-03 2022-03-25 Cooler Heads Care Inc Cooling cap assembly and cooling unit.
JPWO2022210833A1 (en) * 2021-03-31 2022-10-06

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3587899A (en) * 1967-04-10 1971-06-28 Charles E Bender Freeze drying container
US20030039638A1 (en) * 2001-06-21 2003-02-27 Bach Fritz H. Carbon monoxide improves outcomes in tissue and organ transplants and suppresses apoptosis

Family Cites Families (125)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US1379855A (en) 1921-05-31 Joseph donneb
US2031489A (en) 1932-04-15 1936-02-18 Parfumerie St Denis Stable depilatory
US2435854A (en) * 1945-05-07 1948-02-10 Nasa Apparatus for the freezing-drying of tissues
US2487558A (en) 1948-02-24 1949-11-08 Kamlet Jonas Cream depilatory and process for preparing same
US3777507A (en) 1971-11-24 1973-12-11 Waters Instr Inc Renal preservation system
US3881990A (en) 1971-11-24 1975-05-06 Waters Instr Inc Method of transporting and storing organs while retaining the organs in a viable condition
US3995444A (en) 1974-11-08 1976-12-07 American Hospital Supply Corporation Organ perfusion system
US4034753A (en) 1975-09-29 1977-07-12 Connel Allan A Gas anesthesia machine
US4186565A (en) 1978-05-19 1980-02-05 Henry Ford Hospital Perfusion system for organ preservation
US4266573A (en) 1979-10-19 1981-05-12 Airco, Inc. Anesthesia machine having proportion limiting control system
US4292817A (en) 1980-05-12 1981-10-06 The Mead Corporation Controlled temperature shipping assembly
DE3272969D1 (en) 1981-03-16 1986-10-09 Leonora I Jost Anaerobic method for preserving whole blood, tissue and components containing living mammalian cells
US4442856A (en) 1981-08-18 1984-04-17 Puritan-Bennett Oxygen regulator and alarm system for an anesthesia machine
US4377554A (en) 1981-08-26 1983-03-22 Becton, Dickinson And Company Generation of microaerophilic atmosphere
JPS59501733A (en) 1982-09-27 1984-10-18 バクスタ−、トラベノ−ル、ラボラトリ−ズ インコ−ポレイテッド Platelet storage methods and containers
JPS5954598U (en) 1982-10-01 1984-04-10 市川毛織株式会社 Pressure belt for wide nip press of paper machine
CA1216518A (en) 1982-11-01 1987-01-13 Gail A. Rock Plasma-free medium for platelet storage
US4473637A (en) 1982-11-10 1984-09-25 Guibert, Colman & Associates System for processing an organ preparatory to transplant
US4828976A (en) 1983-12-29 1989-05-09 Thomas Jefferson University Glucose free media for storing blood platelets
FR2559648B1 (en) * 1984-02-16 1988-07-08 Air Liquide PROCESS FOR THE PRESERVATION OF PERISHABLE VEGETABLE FOODSTUFFS
US4502295A (en) 1984-02-21 1985-03-05 Mount Carmel Research And Education Corporation Organ hypothermic storage unit
US4562051A (en) 1984-02-27 1985-12-31 Becton, Dickinson And Company Generation of anaerobic or microaerophilic atmosphere
DE3688604T2 (en) 1985-04-30 1993-10-28 Toray Industries Optical device and method for its manufacture.
US4723974A (en) 1985-07-26 1988-02-09 Ammerman Stephen W Transporting container for an amputated extremity
US4798824A (en) 1985-10-03 1989-01-17 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Perfusate for the preservation of organs
US5266480A (en) 1986-04-18 1993-11-30 Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc. Three-dimensional skin culture system
US4807442A (en) * 1986-12-03 1989-02-28 Board Of Regents The University Of Texas System Cryo-slamming apparatus and method for ultrarapid cooling of biological samples
US4745759A (en) 1986-12-23 1988-05-24 Bauer Dan O Kidney preservation machine
US5114842A (en) 1987-07-08 1992-05-19 The Scripps Research Institute Peptides and antibodies that inhibit platelet adhesion
US4923442A (en) 1988-05-02 1990-05-08 Cryomedical Sciences Inc. Blood substitute
JPH0251404A (en) 1988-05-31 1990-02-21 Sankyo Kasei Kk Production of anhydrous sodium sulfide crystal
US4920044A (en) * 1988-11-08 1990-04-24 The Cleveland Clinic Foundation Intracellular flush solution for preserving organs
US4951482A (en) 1988-12-21 1990-08-28 Gilbert Gary L Hypothermic organ transport apparatus
US4938961A (en) 1989-04-28 1990-07-03 Geoffrey Collins Organ preservation solution containing pokyethylene gycol and method of performing cardioplegia
US5326706A (en) 1989-07-17 1994-07-05 Research Foundation Of State University Of New York Homeostatic organ preservation system
HUT59557A (en) 1989-07-27 1992-06-29 Leonora I Jost Conserving and storing container for biological materials and process for ex vivo conserving living mammalian materials
US5231025A (en) 1989-11-03 1993-07-27 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Anti-platelet monoclonal antibody
US5066578A (en) 1989-12-21 1991-11-19 The Regents Of The University Of California Long-term preservation of organs for transplantation
US5466468A (en) 1990-04-03 1995-11-14 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Parenterally administrable liposome formulation comprising synthetic lipids
FR2667297B1 (en) 1990-09-28 1994-05-27 Electrolux Sarl AIR-CONDITIONED MEDICAL CONTAINER.
US5395314A (en) 1990-10-10 1995-03-07 Life Resuscitation Technologies, Inc. Brain resuscitation and organ preservation device and method for performing the same
US5584804A (en) 1990-10-10 1996-12-17 Life Resuscitation Technologies, Inc. Brain resuscitation and organ preservation device and method for performing the same
US5399363A (en) 1991-01-25 1995-03-21 Eastman Kodak Company Surface modified anticancer nanoparticles
US5569579A (en) 1991-04-01 1996-10-29 Thomas Jefferson University Synthetic-based platelet storage media
US5157930A (en) 1991-04-22 1992-10-27 Mcghee Samuel C Organ preservation apparatus
US5723282A (en) 1991-07-08 1998-03-03 The American National Red Cross Method of preparing organs for vitrification
US5217860A (en) 1991-07-08 1993-06-08 The American National Red Cross Method for preserving organs for transplantation by vitrification
US5645081A (en) 1991-11-14 1997-07-08 Wake Forest University Method of treating tissue damage and apparatus for same
US5636643A (en) 1991-11-14 1997-06-10 Wake Forest University Wound treatment employing reduced pressure
US5328821A (en) * 1991-12-12 1994-07-12 Robyn Fisher Cold and cryo-preservation methods for human tissue slices
US5552267A (en) 1992-04-03 1996-09-03 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Solution for prolonged organ preservation
US5370989A (en) 1992-04-03 1994-12-06 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Solution for prolonged organ preservation
CA2154898C (en) 1993-01-29 1999-11-23 Joseph A. Haslwanter Stable sulfide compositions, uses, and process for preparation thereof
WO1994017178A1 (en) 1993-01-29 1994-08-04 New Brunswick Scientific Co., Inc. Method and apparatus for anchorage and suspension cell culture
US5801029A (en) 1993-02-16 1998-09-01 Onyx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cytopathic viruses for therapy and prophylaxis of neoplasia
US5464768A (en) * 1993-02-24 1995-11-07 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force Enhanced nitrite production in transfected murine cells
US5508012A (en) 1993-03-05 1996-04-16 Quaker Chemical Corporation Methods for recovering sodium sulfides from a sulfur scavenging reaction
US5599659A (en) * 1993-03-11 1997-02-04 Breonics, Inc. Preservation solution for ex vivo, warm preservation of tissues, explants,organs and vascular endothelial cells comprising retinal-derived fibroblast growth factor, cyclodextrin and chondroitin sulfate
US5801005A (en) 1993-03-17 1998-09-01 University Of Washington Immune reactivity to HER-2/neu protein for diagnosis of malignancies in which the HER-2/neu oncogene is associated
SE9302431D0 (en) 1993-07-16 1993-07-16 Ab Astra USE OF INDENOINDOLE COMPOUNDS
US5405742A (en) 1993-07-16 1995-04-11 Cyromedical Sciences, Inc. Solutions for tissue preservation and bloodless surgery and methods using same
US5543158A (en) 1993-07-23 1996-08-06 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Biodegradable injectable nanoparticles
US5770583A (en) 1994-01-25 1998-06-23 Schering-Plough Healthcare Products, Inc. Stable sulfide compositions uses and process for preparation thereof
WO1995031897A1 (en) 1994-05-20 1995-11-30 Vec Tec, Inc. Method and apparatus monitoring viability of transplantable organs
GB9506466D0 (en) 1994-08-26 1995-05-17 Prolifix Ltd Cell cycle regulated repressor and dna element
US5476764A (en) * 1994-09-16 1995-12-19 The Regents Of The University Of California Method using CO for extending the useful shelf-life of refrigerated red blood cells
US5635344A (en) 1994-12-07 1997-06-03 Cedra Corp. Shipping medium for organ-derived cells
US5554497A (en) 1994-12-12 1996-09-10 Charlotte-Mecklenburg Hospital Authority Cardioplegic solution for arresting an organ
US5568910A (en) 1995-03-02 1996-10-29 Delmarva Laboratories, Inc. Anesthesia machine
JP3543869B2 (en) 1995-03-07 2004-07-21 株式会社メニコン Cultured skin and method for producing the same
IE80468B1 (en) 1995-04-04 1998-07-29 Elan Corp Plc Controlled release biodegradable nanoparticles containing insulin
US5791151A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-08-11 Verhaag; Hubert Method of preserving tissues and organs
US5739169A (en) 1996-05-31 1998-04-14 Procept, Incorporated Aromatic compounds for inhibiting immune response
US6013256A (en) 1996-09-24 2000-01-11 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Method of preventing acute rejection following solid organ transplantation
ATE358492T1 (en) 1996-09-27 2007-04-15 Univ Columbia TREATMENT OF ISCHEMIC DISORDER AND TO IMPROVE INFARCT OUTCOME
US5952168A (en) 1996-11-07 1999-09-14 21St Century Medicine, Inc. Method for vitrification of biological materials using alkoxylated compounds
US5912019A (en) 1997-02-07 1999-06-15 Musc Foundation For Research Development Compounds for reducing ischemia/reperfusion injury
US6164276A (en) 1997-05-16 2000-12-26 Datex-Ohmeda, Inc. Accurate dose nitric oxide pulse delivery device with monitoring and alarms
US6100082A (en) 1997-09-23 2000-08-08 Hassanein; Waleed H. Perfusion apparatus and method including chemical compositions for maintaining an organ
US6109260A (en) 1998-02-18 2000-08-29 Datex-Ohmeda, Inc. Nitric oxide administration device with timed pulse
US6054261A (en) 1998-05-20 2000-04-25 Q-Pharma, Inc. Coenzyme Q10 compositions for organ protection during perfusion
FR2785501B1 (en) 1998-11-10 2001-01-05 Centre Nat Rech Scient PERFUSION AND / OR PRESERVATION AND / OR REPERFUSION SOLUTION DURING ORGAN TRANSPLANTATION
US7678390B2 (en) * 1999-04-01 2010-03-16 Yale University Carbon monoxide as a biomarker and therapeutic agent
US6365338B1 (en) 1999-04-27 2002-04-02 David A. Bull Organ preservative solution containing trehalose, anti-oxidant, cations and an energy source
RU2177774C2 (en) * 1999-04-29 2002-01-10 Научно-исследовательский центр курортологии и реабилитации (г.Сочи) Черноморского зонального управления специализированных санаториев МЗ РФ Method for treating cardiac ischemia disease, tension stenocardia of functional class i-ii
FR2793651B1 (en) 1999-05-18 2003-05-16 Cair L G L AQUEOUS TISSUE AND ORGAN CONSERVATION SOLUTION
US6552083B1 (en) 1999-07-16 2003-04-22 Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Agents inhibiting chronic rejection reactions after organ transplantation
RU2177299C2 (en) * 1999-07-29 2001-12-27 Научно-исследовательский центр курортологии и реабилитации (г.Сочи) Черноморского зонального управления специализированных санаториев Method for treating cardiac ischemia disease and tension stenocardia of functional class i-ii
EP1244353B1 (en) 1999-12-21 2004-11-17 Viacell, LLC Compositions for the storage of platelets
US6492103B1 (en) 2000-01-31 2002-12-10 Organ Recovery Systems, Inc. System for organ and tissue preservation and hypothermic blood substitution
AU2001232337A1 (en) 2000-02-18 2001-08-27 Kanagawa Academy Of Science And Technology Pharmaceutical composition, reagent and method for intracerebral delivery of pharmaceutically active ingredient or labeling substance
AU2001259169A1 (en) 2000-04-26 2001-11-07 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Cesert genes, proteins, and modulatory compounds
NZ523247A (en) 2000-05-27 2004-06-25 Exelixis Deutschland Gmbh Use of the teleost alevin system for the screening of antiarrythmic drugs
IL153321A0 (en) 2000-06-09 2003-07-06 Univ Leland Stanford Junior Methods and devices for manipulating the thermoregulatory status of a mammal
US6557492B1 (en) 2002-07-19 2003-05-06 Sea Chick, Inc. System for transporting and storing live fish, components thereof and methods based thereon
AUPQ906300A0 (en) 2000-07-28 2000-08-24 Monash University Method of preserving cells and uses thereof
US6490880B1 (en) 2000-10-26 2002-12-10 Islet Technology Inc. Regulated organ containment shipping system using dual-layer preservation liquid
FR2816212A1 (en) 2000-11-03 2002-05-10 Air Liquide Sante Int Use of carbon monoxide to treat or prevent cardiovascular inflammation e.g. ischemia, reperfusion, stenosis, restenosis, and platelet aggregation
GB0111872D0 (en) 2001-05-15 2001-07-04 Northwick Park Inst For Medica Therapeutic agents and methods
EP1395241B9 (en) 2001-05-25 2005-06-15 Medtronic, Inc. Implantable medical device with controllable gaseous agent release system
WO2002101018A2 (en) 2001-06-11 2002-12-19 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods for inducing reversible stasis
US6472390B1 (en) * 2001-11-13 2002-10-29 Duke University Use of therapeutic dosages for nitric oxide donors which do not significantly lower blood pressure or pulmonary artery pressure
CA2468083C (en) 2001-12-06 2016-02-23 Fibrogen, Inc. Use of heterocyclic carboxamides to treat anemia
KR20040096571A (en) 2002-02-13 2004-11-16 베쓰 이스라엘 디코니스 메디칼 센터 인크 Methods of treating vascular disease
GB0206711D0 (en) 2002-03-21 2002-05-01 Isis Innovation HIF Inhibitor
JP4585765B2 (en) 2002-04-15 2010-11-24 ユニバーシティ オブ ピッツバーグ オブ ザ コモンウェルス システム オブ ハイヤー エデュケイション How to treat necrotizing enterocolitis
IL149611A (en) 2002-05-13 2011-07-31 Safetin Ltd Method for extended storage of viable and pathogen-safe blood and blood components using carbon monoxide
US20030235571A1 (en) 2002-06-19 2003-12-25 Gabriel Gojon-Romanillos Systemic treatment of pathological conditions resulting from oxidative stress and/or redox imbalance
AU2003283982A1 (en) 2002-11-07 2004-06-03 University Of Pittsburgh Of The Commonwealth System Of High Education Treatment for hemorrhagic shock
US20060166182A1 (en) 2002-12-31 2006-07-27 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Ilinois A Body Corporate And Politic Of The State Of Il. Tissue and organ preservation, protection and resuscitation
DE10306766A1 (en) 2003-02-18 2004-08-26 Ino Therapeutics Gmbh Dosed delivery of a therapeutic gas
US6857443B2 (en) 2003-02-24 2005-02-22 George A. Volgyesi Electronic gas blender and gas flow control mechanism therefor
WO2004108681A1 (en) 2003-06-06 2004-12-16 Fibrogen, Inc. Nitrogen-containing heteroaryl compounds and their use in increasing endogenous erythropoietin
AU2004285468B2 (en) 2003-10-22 2011-02-24 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US20050136125A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2005-06-23 Roth Mark B. Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US20050170019A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2005-08-04 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells
US20080085329A1 (en) 2003-10-22 2008-04-10 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center, Inc. Methods, Compositions and Devices for Inducing Stasis in Cells, Tissues, Organs, and Organisms
US20050119243A1 (en) 2003-11-07 2005-06-02 Harris Wayne B. HIF-1 inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20050217667A1 (en) 2004-03-30 2005-10-06 Sunil Dhuper Aerosol deliver apparatus IV
US7326809B2 (en) 2004-05-27 2008-02-05 Antibe Therapeutics Inc. Salts of 4- or 5-aminosalicylic acid
WO2006085127A1 (en) 2005-02-08 2006-08-17 Antibe Therapeutics, Inc. Topical compositions
WO2006102536A2 (en) 2005-03-23 2006-09-28 University Of Southern California Treatment of disease conditions through modulation of hydrogen sulfide produced by small intestinal bacterial overgrowth
MX2007013196A (en) 2005-04-20 2008-01-18 Hutchinson Fred Cancer Res Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms.
US8092838B2 (en) 2005-04-29 2012-01-10 The University Of Houston System Use of hydrogen sulfide in the treatment of eye diseases
US20060270635A1 (en) 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 Wallace John L Derivatives of 4- or 5-aminosalicylic acid

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3587899A (en) * 1967-04-10 1971-06-28 Charles E Bender Freeze drying container
US20030039638A1 (en) * 2001-06-21 2003-02-27 Bach Fritz H. Carbon monoxide improves outcomes in tissue and organ transplants and suppresses apoptosis

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070078113A1 (en) * 2005-04-20 2007-04-05 Roth Mark B Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US8822535B2 (en) 2005-04-20 2014-09-02 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
WO2020186206A1 (en) * 2019-03-13 2020-09-17 Membrane Protective Technologies, Inc. Methods and systems for protective supplementation during temperature depression

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2011202385A1 (en) 2011-06-09
EP1684580A2 (en) 2006-08-02
BRPI0415752A (en) 2006-12-19
JP2007509163A (en) 2007-04-12
WO2005039291A3 (en) 2005-08-25
WO2005041656A2 (en) 2005-05-12
US20050147692A1 (en) 2005-07-07
US7993681B2 (en) 2011-08-09
EP2363022A3 (en) 2011-12-21
AU2004285477A1 (en) 2005-05-12
EP2363022A2 (en) 2011-09-07
WO2005039291A2 (en) 2005-05-06
JP2007526241A (en) 2007-09-13
EP1689228A2 (en) 2006-08-16
WO2005041656A3 (en) 2005-08-25
AU2004283729A1 (en) 2005-05-06
JP4914216B2 (en) 2012-04-11
AU2011202385B9 (en) 2013-09-19
CA2542806A1 (en) 2005-05-12
EP2949212A1 (en) 2015-12-02
AU2004285468B2 (en) 2011-02-24
AU2004285468A1 (en) 2005-05-12
JP2007509162A (en) 2007-04-12
CA2542810A1 (en) 2005-05-12
CA2542426A1 (en) 2005-05-06
AU2011202385B2 (en) 2013-05-16
CN1901795A (en) 2007-01-24
WO2005041655A1 (en) 2005-05-12
HK1216284A1 (en) 2016-11-04
EP1684579A1 (en) 2006-08-02
CN1901795B (en) 2014-03-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7993681B2 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in tissues and organs
US20050170019A1 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells
US8822535B2 (en) Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US20150164064A1 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
US20050136125A1 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
CN101203231A (en) Methods, compositions and articles of manufacture for enhancing survivability of cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
AU2016201755A1 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
AU2013216643B2 (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms
MXPA06004527A (en) Methods, compositions and devices for inducing stasis in cells, tissues, organs, and organisms

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION